Yamaha RX-A3080/RX-A2080 Owner’s Manual

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.
• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.
• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.
EN
CONTENTS
Introduction
5
3 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................49
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) .................................49
Accessories................................................................................... 5
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only) .....................................50
About this book ............................................................................ 5
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna .....51
About remote control .................................................................... 6
Connecting the network cable.....................................................................................................................51
Preparing the wireless antenna ...................................................................................................................51
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 Connecting other devices............................................................52
Operating range of the remote control......................................................................................................... 6
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function ........................................................................52
FEATURES
6 Connecting the power cable ........................................................52
7
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language ........................................53
What you can do with the unit ........................................................ 7
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings..................................54
AV CONTROLLER........................................................................................................................................... 12
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) ..................55
AV SETUP GUIDE........................................................................................................................................... 12
Multi Measure................................................................................................................................................57
MusicCast CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................................. 12
Angle/Height Measure ..................................................................................................................................58
Part names and functions .............................................................13
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) ................................................................................58
Front panel ................................................................................................................................................... 13
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)........................................................................61
Front display (indicators) ............................................................................................................................ 15
Checking the measurement results .............................................................................................................64
Rear panel..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments.................................................................................................64
Remote control ............................................................................................................................................ 18
Error messages .............................................................................................................................................65
Warning messages ........................................................................................................................................66
PREPARATIONS
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly .................................67
19
Connecting with a wireless router (access point) .......................................................................................67
Connecting the unit to a wireless network..................................................................................................68
General setup procedure ..............................................................19
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network ........................................73
1 Connecting speakers ..................................................................20
MusicCast CONTROLLER ..............................................................................................................................73
Basic speaker configuration ........................................................................................................................ 21
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ..................................................................................................73
Advanced speaker configuration ................................................................................................................ 30
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices .........................................42
PLAYBACK
Input/output jacks and cables .................................................................................................................... 42
74
Connecting a TV ........................................................................................................................................... 44
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) ................................................................................. 45
Basic playback procedure .............................................................74
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) ......................................................................................... 47
Selecting an HDMI output jack.....................................................................................................................74
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ................................................................................................ 48
En
2
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) ......................................................................................75
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites) ...........................................................................107
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay................................ 108
Registering a scene ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents ..................................................................................................108
Selecting the sound mode.............................................................76
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ............ 110
Playing back with surround effects optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI).......................................... 77
Multi-zone configuration examples ...........................................................................................................110
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) ............................................................................. 77
Preparing the multi zone system ...............................................................................................................111
Enjoying unprocessed playback.................................................................................................................. 81
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 ...........................................................................................................114
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct).......................................................................................... 82
Registering favorite items (shortcut) ........................................... 116
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer) .................................................................................................................... 82
Registering an item.....................................................................................................................................116
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models) ....................................................83
Viewing the current status.......................................................... 117
Recalling a registered item.........................................................................................................................116
Switching information on the front display ..............................................................................................117
Setting the frequency steps......................................................................................................................... 83
Viewing the status information on the TV .................................................................................................118
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 84
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu)........................................................................... 119
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) .............................................................................................. 84
Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................86
Option menu items.....................................................................................................................................119
Preparing the DAB tuning ............................................................................................................................ 87
CONFIGURATIONS
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................ 87
125
Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)....................................................................................... 88
Displaying the DAB information .................................................................................................................. 89
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) ................................ 125
Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label ........................................................................... 90
Setup menu items.......................................................................................................................................126
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models only) .............................................92
Speaker .......................................................................................................................................................131
Selecting a frequency for reception ............................................................................................................ 92
Scene ...........................................................................................................................................................142
Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................... 93
Video/HDMI .................................................................................................................................................143
Radio Data System tuning ........................................................................................................................... 95
Network.......................................................................................................................................................146
Playing back music via Bluetooth ..................................................96
Bluetooth ....................................................................................................................................................149
Sound ..........................................................................................................................................................136
Multi Zone ...................................................................................................................................................150
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit ...................................................................................... 96
System.........................................................................................................................................................152
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device.........................97
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 158
Connecting a USB storage device ............................................................................................................... 97
ADVANCED SETUP menu items ..................................................................................................................159
Playback of USB storage device contents .................................................................................................. 98
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) ......................................................................159
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ................. 101
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) ................................................................159
Media sharing setup................................................................................................................................... 101
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) ...........................................................................................159
Playback of PC music contents ................................................................................................................. 102
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP).........................................................160
Listening to Internet radio .......................................................... 105
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)...........................................................................................160
Playback of Internet radio ......................................................................................................................... 105
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) .......................................................160
En
3
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) ...................................................................................... 161
Multi-zone output ...................................................................... 181
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE) .................................................................... 161
Information on HDMI.................................................................. 181
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)........................................................................ 161
HDMI Control...............................................................................................................................................181
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)............................................................................................... 162
Audio Return Channel (ARC) ......................................................................................................................183
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE).................................................................................................... 162
HDMI signal compatibility ..........................................................................................................................183
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) ............................................................................................... 162
Trademarks............................................................................... 184
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network .............................. 163
Specifications............................................................................ 185
Updating the unit’s firmware .................................................................................................................... 163
APPENDIX
164
Frequently asked questions ........................................................ 164
Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 165
First, check the following:.......................................................................................................................... 165
Power, system and remote control........................................................................................................... 165
Audio........................................................................................................................................................... 167
Video ........................................................................................................................................................... 169
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)................................................................................................................ 170
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only).............................................. 170
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................................... 171
USB and network ....................................................................................................................................... 172
Error indications on the front display .......................................... 174
Glossary .................................................................................... 175
Audio information (audio decoding format) ............................................................................................ 175
Audio Information (Others) ....................................................................................................................... 177
HDMI and video information ..................................................................................................................... 177
Network information ................................................................................................................................. 178
Yamaha technologies................................................................................................................................. 178
Supported devices and file formats ............................................. 179
Supported devices ..................................................................................................................................... 179
File formats................................................................................................................................................. 179
Video signal flow........................................................................ 180
Video conversion table .............................................................................................................................. 180
En
4
Introduction
Accessories
About this book
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
# AM antenna
The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3080 (U.S.A. model), unless
otherwise specified.
# YPAO microphone
In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without
notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
# Microphone base
Pole
This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to
“iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
# FM antenna
(except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Icons used in this manual
Y
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
X
# Power cable
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
# Remote control
# DAB/FM antenna
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
# Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x2)
# Quick Start Guide
* (Except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
One of the above FM antennas is supplied depending on the region of purchase.
* The microphone base and pole are used for angle/height measurement during YPAO.
* The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.
En
5
About remote control
This section explains how to use the supplied remote control.
Batteries
Insert the batteries the right way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the
operating range shown below.
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
En
6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
The unit is equipped with the various useful features.
More advanced ENTERTAINMENT
sound programs (p.78)
Various wireless connection
methods (p.67)
Connecting various devices (p.42)
By processing front left and front right sound fields
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on
individually, the ENTERTAINMENT sound programs are
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD
further improved in acoustic positioning and sound
network cable connection.
players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles,
transition. These programs allow you to enjoy clearer vocal
camcorders, and other devices.
and instrumental sounds, distinct narrations, and more
dynamic sound effects.
Playing back TV audio in surround
sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel:
ARC) (p.42)
Providing a realistic feel and
surround effect optimized for the
scene of the content
(SURROUND:AI) (p.77)
Home Audio Network with
MusicCast (p.73)
The unit supports the MusicCast feature that allows you to
link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a
different room and play them back simultaneously, or
control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated
application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI
cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes the scene of the
TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
content and creates the optimal surround effect for it.
HDMI Control
TV audio
This AI instantaneously analyzes scenes by focusing on
sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background music”,
“ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as optimizes
Video from external
device
the surround effect in real time.
This creates a compelling sense of realism with expressive
power beyond conventional sound field effects.
En
7
Low power consumption (p.157)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s
power consumption.
CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires
for more than 30 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.
What is a sound field?
CINEMA DSP
We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly
Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound
but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or
fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this
ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the
data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs
shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give
using CINEMA DSP.
us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as
This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific
content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field
actually being in that scene.)
CINEMA DSP HD3
“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full
advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data.
It delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as
conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an
utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.
Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit
Capability for reproducing reflections
Level
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3
CINEMA DSP 3D
Time
En
8
YPAO
YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal listening environment for
maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.
YPAO-R.S.C.
YPAO 3D measurement
In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing
The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of presence
of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from the walls or ceiling.
speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to
“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces the
maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.
acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level
Compensation
Time
YPAO Volume
YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume level so
Level
High
that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.
Low
YPAO Volume ON
YPAO Volume OFF
Frequency
High
En
9
Unrivaled audio and video quality
You can enjoy unrivaled high-quality audio and videos with the unit.
High-resolution music enhancer
High-quality video processing
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as
content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the
a high-quality image (p.143).
musicality in the original content (p.122).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
Before processing
Loudness
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.
Frequency
After processing
Loudness
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal
Frequency
En
10
Expandable to meet diverse needs
The unit provides excellent expandability which is applicable to all uses.
Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp
expansion
Multi-zone function
The multi-zone function (p.110) allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).
To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp
(The following shows examples of use.)
expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp).
For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.30).
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
The best expandability in Yamaha (RX-A3080 only)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the
By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an
speakers of a different room.
11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.
(Example)
External power amp
Study room
(such as Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection)
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music
being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)
Living room (main zone)
En
11
Useful applications
The following applications provide you the flexibility to control the unit or assist you with the cable connections.
AV CONTROLLER
AV SETUP GUIDE
MusicCast CONTROLLER
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” is an application that allows you
Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
cable connections between AV receiver and source devices
to link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you
compatible devices in other rooms and play them back
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
through the various settings such as speaker connections,
simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or
commands and playback source.
TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the
other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily
speaker system.
select music to play back as well as configure the unit and
Functions
MusicCast compatible devices.
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
Functions
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
Functions
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance
• Selecting and playing back various content
• Playback control (including music selection for some
with illustrations)
– Play back music from your mobile device
• Viewing owner’s manual
– Select an Internet radio station
X
X
– Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google
For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google
Play.
Play.
sources)
– Play back music files stored on a USB storage device
• Operating and configuring the unit
– Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the
audio output
– Select from a wide variety of sound processing features
X
For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.
En
12
Part names and functions
This section explains the functions of the parts of the unit.
Front panel
a
b c
d
e
f
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
SETUP
OPTION
AI
SCENE
STRAIGHT
1
2
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
3
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
g
a MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
b Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.145)
• HDMI Standby Through is enabled (p.145)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.147)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.150)
1A
YPAO MIC
L
SILENT CINEMA
AUDIO
R
h
i
f PURE DIRECT key
Opening the front panel door
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.82).
g INPUT knob
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
Selects an input source.
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
h Front panel door
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).
i VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
c AI indicator
Lights up when the SURROUND:AI is enabled (p.77)
d Front display
Displays information (p.15).
e Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.6).
En
13
■ Inside of the front panel door
a
b
cd e
SETUP
AI
OPTION
fg
h
ij
SCENE
STRAIGHT
1
2
3
kl
m
INFO (WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
n
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
o
a SETUP key
Displays the Setup menu on the TV.
b Menu operations keys
Cursor keys: Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER: Confirms a selected item.
RETURN: Returns to the previous screen.
c OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.119).
d HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
e AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).
f STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
p
q
L
AUDIO
R
r
h SCENE keys
Select the assigned input source (including the selected radio
station or content when it is assigned), sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is
in standby mode (p.75).
i MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2-4: Enables/disables the audio output to each zone
(p.114).
ZONE CONTROL: Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys
and knobs on the front panel (p.114).
j INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.117).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button
configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.69).
Registers FM/AM/DAB radio stations as preset stations (p.84, p.88,
p.93).
Enters MusicCast CONTROLLER registration by holding down for 5
seconds (p.73).
Registers USB/network contents or Bluetooth input source as
shortcuts (p.116).
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.76).
FM and DAB keys (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Switch between FM and DAB (p.87, p.84).
m PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/DAB radio station (p.88, p.93) (Australia, U.K.,
Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or a preset FM/AM radio
station (p.85) (other models).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.116).
n TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.84).
o USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.97).
p YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.55).
k MEMORY key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.81).
g PROGRAM keys
(U.S.A. model)
l FM and AM keys (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
Switch between FM and AM (p.84).
En
14
q PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
r AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.48).
Front display (indicators)
a bc
d
e
h
f g
j
i
k
ECO
VOL. MUTE A-DRC
VIRTUAL YPAO VOL.
ZONE ZONE ZONE PARTY
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED
Hi-Res ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
lmn
o
p
q r
a HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2/OUT3
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal.
b ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.157).
c Firmware update indicator
Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network
(p.163)
d LINK MASTER
Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast
network.
e ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.114).
f STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models) or an
FM/AM radio station signal (other models).
g PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.115).
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL
SBR RPR
rs
h Information display
t
u
r Cursor indicators
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode
name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.117).
i Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
j MUTE
Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
s VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.77), or the virtual surround
processing (p.80) is working.
t Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
k A-DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.121) is working.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
l Wireless LAN indicator
Light up while the unit is connected to a wireless network (p.67).
Y
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the MusicCast
H Surround back speaker (L)
network. For details, see “Adding the unit to the MusicCast network”
J Surround back speaker (R)
(p.73).
B Front presence speaker (L)
m Bluetooth indicator
N Front presence speaker (R)
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.96).
n Hi-Res
M Rear presence speaker (L)
< Rear presence speaker (R)
Lights up when the high-resolution mode (p.122) is working.
o CINEMA DSP indicator
V Subwoofer (2)
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.77) is working.
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD3 is activated.
p ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) is working.
q SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
En
C Subwoofer (1)
15
u YPAO VOL.
Lights up when YPAO Volume is enabled (p.120).
Rear panel
a
b
cd
e
f
g
h
i j
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
b
l
m
n
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
1
ARC
k
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
VIDEO
1
(5 STB)
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
RS-232C
OUT
2
(FRONT)
R
R
IN
PR
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
1
PRE OUT
R
L
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
o
p
q
(RX-A3080 U.S.A. model)
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper
connections.
En
16
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
r
a PHONO jacks
p ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3080)
For connecting to a turntable (p.47).
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111), or for
connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.40).
b Wireless antenna
ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2080)
For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.67) and a Bluetooth connection (p.96).
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.111).
c AUDIO 1-3 jacks
q SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.47).
For connecting to speakers (p.20).
AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
r PRE OUT jacks, PRE OUT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting audio signals (p.47).
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.28) or to an external power amplifier (p.40).
d AV 1-4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).
e HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.42). When using ARC, TV
audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
f COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1-2) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals
(p.46).
g HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.45).
h TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.52).
i REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other
devices from another room (p.113).
j HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.112).
k NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.51).
l RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details.
m VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America models only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.52).
n AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.52).
o ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to radio antennas (p.49).
En
17
Remote control
a
b
c
d
e
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
PARTY
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
o
p
SCENE
f
1
5
2
3
6
4
7
TUNER
hq
NET
8
Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.114).
Turns on/off the party mode (p.115).
BLUETOOTH
YELLOW
f SCENE keys
Switch with one touch between multiple settings set using the
SCENE function. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.75).
BLUE
i
j
g Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
q
kq
l
Y
Presses NET repeatedly to select a desired network source.
h PRESET keys
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
/MENU
HOME
r
AI
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.84).
Recall USB, Bluetooth, or network content that is registered
as a shortcut (p.116).
m
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
sq
tq
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
nq
TUNING
BAND
i OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.119).
ENHANCER
TUNING
j SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.125)
k Menu operation keys
Operates the menu.
l HELP key
In the on-screen menu, the description of a term in the cursor
position appears on the TV. This key is enabled when the “?” icon
is displayed on the on-screen menu.
m Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.76).
n Playback operation keys
Controls playback of the external device.
(RX-A3080)
Let you perform playback operations when “Bluetooth”, “USB” or
“NET”is selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device.
Y
e PARTY key
USB
GREEN
c MAIN/ZONE switch
Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min,
60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode.
PRESET
RED
q External device operation keys
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
d SLEEP key
INPUT
g
Enables/disables the Pure Direct (p.82).
b z (receiver power) key
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
p PURE DIRECT key
o HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.74).
En
18
The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI
Control-compatible devices cannot be used.
r AI key
Turns on/off the SURROUND:AI mode (p.77).
s VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
t MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.20)
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.42)
3 Connecting the radio antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.49)
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.51)
5 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
6 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.52)
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.53)
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.54)
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.55)
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.67)
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (p.73)
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
19
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.30).
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.27).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type
R
E
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1
2
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
9
3
9
5
4
10°~30°
Front (L/R)
12
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Center 3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L/R)
45
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce
surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected.
Surround back (L/R)
67
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Front presence (L/R)
ER
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
Rear presence (L/R)
TY
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos
and DTS:X contents.
10°~30°
Subwoofer 9
T
Y
Function
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of
other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and
place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
X
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the left) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker
6
7
layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such
as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend
using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds).
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce
natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence
speakers.
En
20
Basic speaker configuration
If you do not apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external amplifier) or multi-zone configurations, follow the procedure below to place the speakers in your room and connect
them to the unit.
■ Placing speakers in your room
7.2.2/5.2.4 system [S]
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This
(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)
section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a
X
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark. However,
you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).
E
R
• To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using a speaker system with a S mark.
1
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
2
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker
9
layout” (p.26).
3
9
4
5
T
Y
6
7
X
• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP (p.77).
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the
“Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.54).
• (RX-A3080 only)
By using an external power amplifier (p.31), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.2.4] and enjoy Dolby
Atmos and DTS:X contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.
En
21
5.2.4 system [S] (using rear presence speakers)
7.2.2 system [S] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the
sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back
surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for
speakers.
enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
E
E
R
R
1
1
9
4
3
9
9
5
3
9
4
5
6
T
2
2
7
Y
X
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled
YPAO (p.54).
speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)” setting in the “Setup”
menu before performing YPAO (p.54).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En
22
5.1.2 system [S] (using front presence speakers)
7.1 system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional
This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy
speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not
extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
X
• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing
YPAO (p.54).
• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers
to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.
En
23
5.1 system
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using surround speakers)
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
1
2
4
9
5
3
X
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1 system).
X
When placing surround speakers in the front side, set “Layout (Surround)” in the “Setup” menu to “Front” before
performing YPAO (p.54).
En
24
5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) (using front presence speakers)
2.1 system
We recommend using this speaker system when you cannot place speakers in the rear side of
the room.
E
R
1
9
2
3
X
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1 system.
X
When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the
presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO
(p.54).
En
25
Presence speaker layout
Dolby Enabled SP
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear Height,
Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers
environment (p.133).
that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
X
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately (p.133).
Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound
spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
X
Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit
may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled
speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a reference.
When using two presence speakers
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and
rear sound spaces effectively.
Installation position
Just above the listening position, or the ceiling between extensions of front speakers and
Y
listening position
For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.26).
En
26
■ Setting the speaker impedance
When using four presence speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm
speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
2
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
Installation position
Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position
3
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the listening position and surround (or surround back)
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
speakers
Caution
4
5
Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
En
27
■ Connecting speakers
Speakers to be connected
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Speaker type
Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables
Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire
strands into the unit’s interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.
Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit
or the speakers.
7.2.2/5.2.4
7.1/5.1.2
5.1
2.1
Front (L/R) 1 2
(
(
(
(
Center 3
(
(
(
Surround (L/R) 4 5
(
(
)*5
)*1
)*3
Front presence (L/R) E R
(
)*4
)*6
Rear presence (L/R) T Y
)*2
(
(
Surround back (L/R) 6 7
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before
connecting the speakers.
• Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.
Subwoofer 9
(
(
If you have eleven speakers, you can connect the both surround back speakers and rear
presence speakers. In this case, the unit automatically changes the speakers to be used,
depending on the input signal and CINEMA DSP.
If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence
speakers (*2).
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another.
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers
(*6).
X
• When using surround back speakers, be sure to connect the surround back left and right speakers. Using only
• Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts
one surround back speaker was discontinued.
(rear panel and screws).
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.134) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an
AC wall outlet.
• When apply this speaker configuration, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) to “Basic” (default).
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.40).
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
then check the speaker cables short circuit.
+
–
+
–
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
En
28
Connecting speaker cables
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
(FRONT)
The unit
(rear)
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
1
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and
the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent
PRE OUT
R
L
confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
2
FRONT
SURROUND
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SUR. BACK
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
R
CENTER
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
E
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
2
3
Loosen the speaker terminal.
4
Tighten the terminal.
R
1
Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
+ (red)
+
2
3
FR
ON
T
1
2
4
9
3
9
– (black)
Using a banana plug
4
5
T
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Brazil and General models only)
Y
6
1
Tighten the speaker terminal.
2
Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
7
1
+
FR
ON
T
Banana plug
2
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
(FR
ONT)
1
PRE
OUT
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BACK
(RE
SUBW AR)
OOFE
R
SURR
OUN
CENT
ER
D BA
CK
L
En
29
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.21), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Bi-amp connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,
multichannel amplifier, etc.) to
build an extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
Power-amp channel expansion
(Example)
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2/3
Main zone
En
30
■ Available speaker configurations
(RX-A2080)
Main zone
(RX-A3080)
Output
channel
(max)
Main zone
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
7
External
speakers
External power
amplifier
(required)
Surround back
32
+1 room
7.2.2 +1Zone
32
+2 rooms
7.2 +2Zone
33
Rear presence
7.2.4 [ext.RP]
33
Front
7.2.4 [ext.Front]
34
Surround back
Surround back
11
Front presence
Page
7.2 +1Zone
Front presence
7
Power Amp Assign
(p.131)
+1 room
Surround back
9
Multi-zone
7
Front presence
11
Surround back
Surround back
9
Front presence
7
Surround back
Front presence
Rear presence
Front
Front
+1 room
+2 rooms
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]
34
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp
)
Front presence
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
36
7
)
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
37
11
)
Surround back
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
37
9
)
Front presence
5.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.RP]
38
Rear presence
+1 room
7.2 +1Zone
32
+1 room
7.2.2 +1Zone
32
+2 rooms
7.2 +2Zone
33
Front
+1 room
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
35
Front
+2 rooms
7.2 [ext.Front]
+2Zone
35
Front presence
Surround back
Surround back
9
Front presence
7
Surround back
7
)
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp
36
7
)
Front presence
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
36
7
)
Surround back
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
37
+1 room
Y
“Setup” menu (p.54).
35
)
Rear presence
Page
• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA
7
Front presence
Power Amp Assign
(p.131)
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
7
+1 room
Multi-zone
External power
amplifier
(required)
Surround back
7
Rear presence
External
speakers
Surround back
9
Surround back
11
Bi-amp
SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. The following explanation is based on the
assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.
36
En
31
7.2 +1Zone
7.2.2 +1Zone
E
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
9
3
4
2
1
5
6
7
7
Zone2
Zone2
Main zone
Speaker
2
9
3
4
5
6
R
Main zone
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 1
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
X
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En
32
7.2 +2Zone
7.2.4 [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)
1
1
2
E
2
R
1
9
2
9
3
3
9
4
5
9
Zone2
4
6
5
7
1
2
via
external amp
T
Y
6
Main zone
7
via
external amp
Zone3
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
X
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
When Zone3 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
En
33
7.2.4 [ext.Front] (RX-A3080 only)
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)
via external amp
E
R
E
R
via external amp
via external amp
1
2
3
9
1
9
4
T
Speaker
9
4
Y
6
3
9
5
2
5
T
Y
via
external amp
7
Connect to
6
Speaker
7
via
external amp
Connect to
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
ER
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY
EXTRA SP 2
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).
En
34
7.2.2 [ext.Front] +1Zone
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone
via external amp
via external amp
R
E
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
9
3
6
5
6
7
2
9
3
4
5
4
1
2
Zone2
7
1
Zone2
Main zone
2
Main zone
Zone3
Speaker
Speaker
Connect to
Connect to
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
12
FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
EXTRA SP 1
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 1
Zone3 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
En
35
7.2 Bi-Amp
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E
1
9
2
3
1
9
4
9
5
6
Speaker
R
4
2
3
9
5
7
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
67
(not used)
ER
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 2
TY
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
En
36
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
7.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.FP+RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Bi-amp
Bi-amp
E
R
via external amp
via external amp
1
9
2
1
1
2
9
3
4
3
9
9
4
5
6
2
5
7
Zone2
T
Y
via
external amp
6
7
via
external amp
Main zone
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
TY
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP 2
Speaker
X
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.114), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external
amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.111).
En
37
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP] (RX-A3080 only)
Bi-amp
E
R
1
9
4
2
3
9
5
T
Y
via
external amp
via
external amp
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
ER
EXTRA SP 2
TY
R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
9
SUBWOOFER 1-2
Y
When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external
amplifier for Zone3 (p.111).
En
38
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp
connections
■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers
When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals.
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT
To utilize the EXTRA SP 1-2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign”
terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals.
setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu
The unit (rear)
after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.54).
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
4
6
3
9
5
7
Zone2 or Zone3
9
1
4
2
Main zone
5
Zone2 or Zone3
X
X
• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131)
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP1 terminals output the same signals.
in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.111).
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En
39
g FRONT (XLR) jacks (RX-A3080 only)
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
Output front channel sounds through XLR balanced cables.
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input
jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are
(Example)
output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
Caution
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
B)
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
(6 GAME)
TRIGGER
OUT
ONENT VIDEO
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
(5 STB)
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume
of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the
unit) to the pre-main amplifier.
Main input jack
(ZONE OUT)
IN
2
RS-232C
PR
PR
UT
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
L
L
3/
ENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
R
SPEAKERS
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
FRONT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
3
1
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
AV 2
AV 3
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
Y
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
(5 STB)
PB
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
Y
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
PR
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
L
2
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
FM
AM
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
a b c de
f
g
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
The unit (rear)
a ZONE2/F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).
b ZONE3/R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3080 only)
Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.131).
c FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
d SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
e SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds.
f CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En
L
2
ROUND
HDMI OUT
MAIN IN
OUT
40
CENTER
SUR
R
R
FRONT
L
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
Making balanced connections
Use XLR balanced cables to connect a power amplifier to the FRONT (XLR) jacks on the unit.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 2
AV 3
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
TRIGGER
OUT
OMPONENT VIDEO
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
B AV 2
(5 STB)
PB
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
PR
RE OUT
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
L
2
ZONE 3/
PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
Power amplifier
PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks
Speaker
connections
XLR
(Female connector)
XLR
(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• Hi-Fi amplifier equipped with XLR jacks (to enjoy a 2-channel stereo system with a balanced
connection)
• Multichannel amplifier equipped with unbalanced inputs (to enjoy multichannel CINEMA
DSP)
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 Ω)
En
41
2 Connecting a TV and playback devices
Connect a TV and playback devices (video and audio devices) to the unit.
For information on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.97).
Input/output jacks and cables
The unit is equipped with the following input/output jacks. Prepare the cables that match the jacks on your devices.
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
To input/output video and audio signals, use the following
To input only video signals, use the following jacks.
To input/output only audio signals, use the following jacks.
jacks.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
HDMI jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three components:
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable.
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
luminance (Y), chrominance blue (Pb), and chrominance red
Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable.
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
(Pr). Use a component video cable with three plugs.
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
HDMI cable
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
NENT
COMPO
Y
PB
VIDEO
PR
A AV 1 )
IE
(1 MOV
COAXIAL jacks
Y
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a
cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation.
X
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable.
VIDEO jacks
Digital coaxial cable
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel
(ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features.
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
Video pin cable
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
VIDEO
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable
(RCA cable).
AUDIO3
En
42
Stereo pin cable
XLR jacks
Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced cable.
XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (male)
IO
AUD
4
R
X
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH button
on the unit and then pull the connector out.
XLR output jacks
Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the XLR
balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (female)
T
OU
E
PR TER
N
CE
Y
When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of the
connector and then pull it out.
About the XLR jacks
• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.
XLR input jacks
2. HOT
1. GND
3. COLD
XLR output jacks
1. GND
2. HOT
3. COLD
En
43
X
Connecting a TV
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power
and volume with the TV’s remote control.
■ HDMI connection
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin
on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.181).
cable).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
Y
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.45).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT jack
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
The unit
(rear)
2
1
ARC
HDMI
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
A
1
ARC
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
AV 2
(5 STB)
(1 MOVIE)
AV 3
(5 STB)
AV 4
(6 GAME)
HDMI input
(6 G
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A
PR
(
VIDEO
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
HDMI
B
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
PR
HDMI
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
R
R
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
GND
(2 TV)
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
FRONT
L
L
L
L
R
R
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
R
TV
1 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
En
44
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
If a second TV or projector is connected to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, you can use the remote control
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the
to switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching video (p.74). In addition, a TV, etc.,
unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of
placed in Zone 2 can be connected to the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack on the unit (p.112).
the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI OUT 3 jack
an HDMI output jack.
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
Y
(HDCP2.2)
2
3
1
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting
HDMI
HDMI
(p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A, B), COAXIAL (3, 4, 5)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 3
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
(1 MOVIE)
AV 4
(5 STB)
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
A AV 1
B AV 2
(5 STB)
AUDIO 2
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
(6 GAME)
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
(1 MOVIE)
AUDIO 1
AV 5
AUDIO 3
and OPTICAL (1, 2, 6) jacks to another input source.
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
VIDEO
PHONO
AV 4
1
ARC
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
AV 2
NETWORK
The unit (rear)
(ZONE OUT)
X
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
2
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
TV (already connected)
HDMI input
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI (AV 1-7) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
3
1
ARC
AV 3
6 GAME)
AV 4
(ZONE OUT)
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A AV 1
PR
(1 MOVIE)
TV
Projector
TV
1
(5 STB)
Y
Zone 2/4
PB
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
IN
HDMI output
OUT
2
PR
HDMI
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
L
HDMI
Y
2
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
HDMI
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 and 3 jack.
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
NA
O)
• You can connect a video monitor in Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 3 jack in order to enjoy video and audio.
AM
The zone to be used can be selected with “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Video device
En
45
■ Component video connection
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial,
coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio
digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the
output jacks available on your video device.
audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Input jacks on the unit
Audio
Video
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Audio
Digital coaxial
AV 1-2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1-4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
Component video
Composite video
AV 1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
The unit (rear)
Y
PB
The unit (rear)
PR
HDMI OUT
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
AV 5
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 1
PB
(1 MOVIE)
Video output
(component video)
PR
Y
B AV 2
PB
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
PR
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
(FRONT)
R
1
PRE OUT
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
Y
PB
PR
C
Y
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Video output
(composite video)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
V
Y
AUDIO 3
ZONE OU
L
VIDEO
R
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2/
F.PRESENCE
6 OPTICAL
V
R
L
R
PB
E
R
AUDIO 4
R
Y
AUDIO 4
R
(6 GAME)
AV 4
CENTER
S
R
PHONO
L
R
2
PR
GND
(5 STB)
AV 3
VIDEO
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
(5 STB)
L
AV 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
R
(1 MOVIE)
AV 6
1
ARC
1
ARC
AV 4
AV 1-4 (VIDEO)
jacks
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
C
C
C
C
COAXIAL
ZONE 2/Z
COAXIAL
L
O
Video device
L
L
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL) or
AV 1-2 (AUDIO) jacks
OPTICAL
L
R
R
Video device
O
L
L
R
R
R
R
Audio output
(digital coaxial or analog stereo)
Any of AV 1-2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1-4 (AUDIO) jacks
X
To connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and a digital optical cable, use “Input
Assignment” (p.153) in the “Setup” menu to assign the COMPONENT VIDEO and OPTICAL jacks to the same input
source.
En
46
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO jacks
PHONO
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio
L
L
output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections.
L
Y
L
R
R
R
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
Ground lead
GND
setting (p.153) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (3, 4, 5) and OPTICAL (1, 2,
R
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
6) jacks to another input source.
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
GND
A
1
ARC
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
(6 G
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A
PR
(
• (RX-A3080 only)
VIDEO
Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that its
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
Turntable
B
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
C
PR
C
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.43).
COAXIAL
R
R
X
O
GND
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be
AUDIO 4
R
L
L
OPTICAL
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
SURROUND
O
FRONT
FM
AM
L
L
R
R
R
Audio output jacks on audio device
Digital coaxial
Audio device
Audio input jacks on the unit
AV 1-2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
XLR
Digital optical
AUDIO 1-2 (OPTICAL)
XLR
AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
XLR
Analog stereo (RCA)
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])
Analog stereo (XLR)
AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) (RX-A3080 only)
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
XLR
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL,
OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA], AUDIO [XLR])
jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the AV 1-4, AUDIO 1-4 or PHONO with the input key on the remote control, the
sound played on the audio device will be output from this unit.
* AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR]) jack: RX-A3080 only
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En
47
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
The AUX jacks are convenient for temporarily connecting an audio playback device.
Use stereo pin cables to connect an audio device (such as a CD player) to the unit.
For details on connecting a USB device to the USB jack, see “Connecting a USB storage device”
(p.97).
X
Before making connections, stop playback on the device, and turn down the volume of the unit sufficiently.
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
ZONE CONTROL
HELP
AUX
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
L
L
AUDIO
R
R
The unit (front)
Audio device
If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the audio played back on the device
will be output from the unit.
En
48
3 Connecting the radio antennas
Connect the supplied radio antenna to the unit.
Assembling the AM antenna
FM/AM antennas (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
AV 1
(HDCP2.2)
2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 2
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
AV 4
Hold down
(6 GAME)
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
L
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
IN
2
PR
(FRONT)
R
R
1
PRE OUT
R
X
2
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
Release
R
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
(5 STB)
AUDIO 1
Insert
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
VIDEO
PHONO
AV 7
1
ARC
AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
AV 2
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
AM
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
The unit (rear)
En
49
DAB/FM antenna (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East
and Russia models only)
Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.
DAB/FM antenna
The unit (rear)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
VIDEO
1
(5 STB)
PHONO
L
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(7 TV)
(3 MUSIC)
Y
AUDIO 3
PB
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
IN
2
PR
(FRONT)
R
R
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B AV 2
1
PRE OUT
R
2
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
AUDIO 4
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
ANTENNA
DAB/FM
(4 RADIO)
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
75ȍ
FM
AM
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Y
• The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM
antenna.
En
50
4 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
Y
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may
block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network
software or firewall settings appropriately.
Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or
higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection and Bluetooth connection, stand the
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
wireless antenna up straight.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to
a network device wirelessly” (p.67).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Router
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
(ZONE OUT)
AC IN
Mobile device
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
Y
2
R
L
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
X
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network
Connection” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as
the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure
the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters
manually (p.147).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.136) in the “Network” menu.
En
51
5 Connecting other devices
6 Connecting the power cable
Connect a device compatible with the trigger function.
Before connecting the power cable (Taiwan, Brazil and Central and South America
models only)
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger
function
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet.
as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a
Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard.
AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Y
system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by
The unit (rear)
connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
(ZONE OUT)
cable.
AC IN
GGER
OUT
REMOTE
.1A
TAL
TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks
The unit (rear)
Trigger In
(+12V)
Power amplifier
(such as MX-A5000)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
R
3
(ZONE OUT)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
L
110V120V
FRONT
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
(HDCP2.2)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
OUT
220V240V
TRIGGER
OUT
NETWORK
DMI (HDCP2.2)
IN
RS-232C
ERS
1
SP2
NCE
L
R
CENTER
L
FRONT
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
2
OUT
2
F.PRESENCE
(FRONT)
1
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
PRE OUT
R
L
2
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then
to an AC wall outlet.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
System
connector
jack
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
Yamaha
subwoofer
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
ZONE OUT)
AC IN
OTE
X
RS-232C
To an AC wall outlet
OUT
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.156) in the “Setup”
L
menu.
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
EXTRA SP1
L
F.PRESENCE
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/BI-AMP
En
52
7 Selecting an on-screen menu language
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.
HDMI OUT
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
GREEN
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
YELLOW
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
SETUP
TOP
MENU
ENTER.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
X
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
from the unit.
INPUT
TUNER
5
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
4
Press SETUP.
6
Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “System” and press ENTER.
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
53
8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
HDMI OUT
6
manually before performing YPAO.
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
RED
GREEN
“Power Amp Assign” (p.131), then select your speaker system.
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Configuration” ! “Surround” !
CINEMA FRONT) (p.24)
• When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X
BLUETOOTH
USB
YELLOW
BLUE
SETUP
1
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its layout
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
in “Rear Presence”.
X
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
RETURN
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
4
5
playback, select “Configuration” ! “Front Presence” !
“Layout” (p.133), then select your front presence speaker layout.
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
HOME
“Layout” (p.133), then select “Front”.
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.26)
PRESET
TOP
MENU
• When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
INPUT
TUNER
• When using any of advanced speaker configurations, select
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.30)
1
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press
ENTER.
En
54
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
GREEN
connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
X
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
X
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the
tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed
BLUETOOTH
YPAO MIC
jack
for acoustic perfection.
PRESET
RED
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and
settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
USB
4
listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker
room.
INPUT
TUNER
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your
YELLOW
The unit (front)
Y
BLUE
YPAO MIC
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
E
R
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
1
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
RETURN
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become
an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
1
2
BAND
3
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
YPAO
5
microphone
from the unit.
MEMORY
TUNING
9
– Do not connect headphones.
2
X
TUNING
Ear height
If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
The following screen appears on the TV.
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
X
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the
measurement.
En
55
5
Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Measure” (p.57) or
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
If desired, select the measuring options.
“Angle/Height Measure” (p.58) and press ENTER.
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
SCENE
measurement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When “Measuring option” is set to “Multi Measure”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions” (p.61)
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
When “Measuring option” is not set to “Multi Measure”:
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.58)
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
En
56
Multi Measure
Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Selects multi measure or single measure.
a
d
e
bac
Measuring method
Checked
Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others
to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area
defined by those positions (multi measure).
Unchecked (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the
measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
that position (single measure).
X
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a
wider space.
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated
most frequently.
En
57
Multi measure
(1 listening position +
front/back/left/right)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions +
front/back)
b
c a e
d
c
a b
d
Angle/Height Measure
Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
HDMI OUT
Measure” box is unchecked. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
SCENE
measurement.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
Settings
BLUE
Checked
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
Unchecked
(default)
Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will
measure angle of each speaker and height of the presence
speakers at the listening position, and correct the speaker
parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective
sound fields.
Disables the angle/height measurement.
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
start the measurement immediately.
X
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
finishes.
VOLUME
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
ENHANCER
Proceed to Step 3.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
1
BAND
TUNING
En
58
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
Proceed to Step 2.
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Microphone
base
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
2
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
Perform the angle/height measurement.
1
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Y
AI
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
Microphone base
ENHANCER
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
3
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
4
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
En
59
5
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
4
To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
INPUT
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
BLUE
X
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
5
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
RETURN
Caution
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
After confirming the result, press RETURN to return to the
MEMORY
BAND
3
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
STRAIGHT
TUNING
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
TUNING
“Measurement Finished” screen.
X
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).
En
60
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Follow the procedure below to take a measurement when the “Multi
NET
Measure” box is checked. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the
listening positions.
following screen appears automatically.
Y
(when angle/height measurement is disabled)
• If any error message (such as ERROR 1) or warning message (such as WARNING 1)
Proceed to Step 5.
appears, see “Error messages” (p.65) or “Warning messages” (p.66).
INPUT
TUNER
When the measurements at the positions you want to
measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select
“Skip” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
3
• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
1
BLUE
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Start” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
start the measurement immediately.
X
RETURN
(when angle/height measurement is enabled)
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN or VOLUME keys.
The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
the first position finishes.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position
and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to
8) have been taken.
En
61
Proceed to Step 4.
4
1
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
3
Perform the angle/height measurement.
Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.
Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
Microphone base
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
2
Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
4
position “1”.
5
ENTER
In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
Microphone
base
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.
TUNING
Y
• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.
En
62
5
To check the measurement results, use the cursor keys to
select “Measurement result” and press ENTER.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
X
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.64).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to
select “Save” and press ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
TOP
MENU
HOME
X
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “Cancel”.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
En
63
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Angle
Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position
(horizontal)
Height
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
1
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
RED
GREEN
X
“Angle (horizontal)” and “Height” show the results when angle/height
measurement is performed.
X
You can also select “YPAO Result” (p.135) from “Speaker” (p.131) in the “Setup”
menu, which displays the previous measurement results.
INPUT
TUNER
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select
“Measurement result” and press ENTER.
SCENE
3
To finish checking the results and return to the previous
screen, press RETURN.
The following screen appears.
BLUETOOTH
USB
Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
SETUP
a
b
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and
reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
c
RETURN
a Measurement result items
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
c The number of measured positions (when multi measure is
performed)
ENHANCER
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker” and then “YPAO
Result” (p.135).
b Measurement result details
VOLUME
1
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press
ENTER.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Polarity of each speaker
Wiring
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Size
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
En
64
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Error messages
Error message
Remedy
ERROR 1
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform
Front speakers are not
detected.
YPAO again.
ERROR 2
One of the surround speakers
cannot be detected.
ERROR 3
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.
One of the front presence
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 4
One of the surround back
speakers cannot be detected.
ERROR 5
The noise is too loud.
ERROR 6
Surround back speakers are
connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
ERROR 7
The YPAO microphone has
been removed.
ERROR 8
The YPAO microphone cannot
detect test tones.
ERROR 9
Canceled by user operation
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If you select “Proceed”, YPAO takes the
measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back
speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow
the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error
occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To
cancel the measurement, select “Quit”.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit.
If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha
An internal error has occurred. dealer or service center.
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
One of the rear presence
speakers cannot be detected.
En
65
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then check the speaker connections.
Warning messages
Warning message
Remedy
Select “Wiring” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the cable
connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”.
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement
results by following on-screen instructions.
WARNING 1
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal
A speaker cable may be
connected with the reverse
polarity (+/-).
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
speaker settings.
WARNING 2
A speaker is placed more than
24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
WARNING 3
There are significant volume
differences between the
speakers.
En
66
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message
may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case,
you can ignore the message.
Select “Distance” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and move the speaker
identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening
position.
Select “Level” in “Measurement result” (p.64) and check the speaker
identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and
cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the
unit.
Internet
Wireless router
Modem
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.68).
En
67
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Select a connection method according to your environment.
4
5
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
press ENTER.
• Using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73)
SCENE
1
2
3
• Sharing the iOS device setting (p.68)
4
6
• Using the WPS push button configuration (p.69)
5
6
TUNER
NET
7
8
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
and select “OK”.
• Using other connection methods (p.70)
INPUT
BLUETOOTH
USB
■ Sharing the iOS device setting
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
You can easily set up a wireless connection by applying the connection
BLUE
SETUP
settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
wireless router.
Y
X
If you set up a wireless connection with this method, the following settings will be
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
initialized.
7
– Network settings
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
– Bluetooth settings
Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
– USB and network items registered as shortcuts
ENHANCER
– Internet radio stations register to “Favorites”
– Account information for the network services
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
• You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example
for iOS 8.)
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Y
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi
Press SETUP.
En
68
8
After checking the on-screen message, use the cursor
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS
keys and ENTER to select “NEXT”.
button.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Y
HDMI OUT
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
2
INPUT
TUNER
NET
■ Using the WPS push button configuration
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
9
BLUE
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in
3
the Wi-Fi screen.
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
Cursor keys
ENTER
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
the front display.
TOP
MENU
HOME
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
connection method.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
The name of the unit
ENHANCER
10 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Tap here to start setup
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to
the selected network (access point).
En
69
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
■ Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video
Y
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
The following connection methods are available.
unit via HDMI.
SETUP
HOME
connection method and select “NEXT”.
from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
INPUT
TOP
MENU
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select the desired
wireless network settings.
1
2
SCENE
1
configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the
7
3
4
5
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button
while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions
displayed on the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press ENTER.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.68).
Use the cursor keys to select “Network Connection” and
Access Point Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an
access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an
access point” (p.71).
Press SETUP.
press ENTER.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
6
ENHANCER
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)”
Manual Setting
and select “OK”.
STRAIGHT
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the
required information (such as SSID) manually.
For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless
connection manually” (p.71).
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
PIN Code
X
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En
70
You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s
PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The
method is available if the wireless router (access point)
supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings,
see “Using the PIN code” (p.72).
Searching for an access point
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless
starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available
connection setting screen appears on the TV.
access points appears on the TV screen.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
security key for your network.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
1
access point and select “NEXT”.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the
access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
2
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
and select “NEXT”.
BLUE
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
2
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the security
method of the access point and select “NEXT”.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
3
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
STRAIGHT
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
the TV screen.
TUNING
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
connection method.
4
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
71
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available
and select “NEXT”.
access points appears on the TV screen.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
Using the PIN code
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
to Step 4.
SCENE
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26
1
2
3
4
hexadecimal digits.
5
6
7
8
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or
TUNER
NET
access point and select “NEXT”.
2
BLUETOOTH
USB
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
64 hexadecimal digits.
INPUT
1
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point).
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
BLUE
wireless router (access point).
SETUP
3
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
4
the TV screen.
Use the cursor keys to select “CONNECT” and press
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another
ENTER to start the connection process.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
connection method.
VOLUME
When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on
ENHANCER
the TV screen.
STRAIGHT
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
TUNING
5
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
72
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
11 Connecting to the MusicCast network
MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of
HDMI OUT
SCENE
your mobile device and tap “Setup”.
music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use
X
2
3
4
application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible
5
6
7
8
products, visit the Yamaha website.
TUNER
NET
• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the
RED
GREEN
BLUETOOTH
USB
dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the
network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”.
3
YELLOW
BLUE
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the on screen instructions, then hold down
CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds.
• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different
PRESET
Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on
devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and
1
INPUT
2
room and play them back simultaneously.
• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music
streaming services may differ depending on your region and product.)
MusicCast CONTROLLER
TOP
MENU
HOME
CONNECT
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
4
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application
following the onscreen instructions to set up the network.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
5
playback.
need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on
the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device.
Adding the unit to the MusicCast network
Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network.
You can also configure the unit’s wireless settings at once.
Y
• AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.
• When Pure Direct is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB
cannot be delivered.
• If you configure the unit’s wireless settings with this method, the Wireless LAN
indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even
if a wired connection is used).
• You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit
(MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.149) in the
Y
“Setup” menu.
• The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.
• If your router supports multiple SSID’s (network names), connect the mobile device
to the first access point (“SSID 1”, etc.).
1
Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
En
73
PLAYBACK
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
Basic playback procedure
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD
player) connected to the unit.
1
INPUT
Input selection keys
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
2
3
Selecting an HDMI output jack
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for
signal output changes.
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
HDMI OUT Sel.
OUT 1+2
station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
OUT 1+2
pages.
TOP
MENU
HOME
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Russia models only) (p.86)
ENHANCER
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
MUTE
STRAIGHT
Russia models only) (p.92)
MEMORY
TUNING
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
BAND
Off
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
VOLUME
X
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.75).
supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)
connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack,
the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• When the MAIN/ZONE switch on the remote control is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE4”,
• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)
pressing the HDMI OUT key can enable (OUT 3) or disable (OFF) the HDMI OUT3 jack
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)
4
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)
TUNING
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and
HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 2
East and Russia models) (p.83)
AI
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
OUT 1
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
VOL.
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
X
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu.
En
74
output.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
You can use up to 8 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch
SCENE
them depending on a playback source.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
1
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
The SCENE name appears on the front display and on the TV.
ENTER
2
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
1
2
3
4
Input
AV1
AV2
AV3
AV4
SCENE
5
6
7
8
Input
AV5
AV6
AV7
AV1
Press numbered key (1 to 8), and then the input source
and settings registered to the corresponding scene are
directly selected. The unit turns on automatically when it
is in standby mode.
Alternatively, you can also select a registered scene by
pressing SCENE repeatedly.
BLUETOOTH
USB
SCENE
SCENE
INPUT
TUNER
Zone4
sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
RETURN
X
• You can check the detailed settings of each scene from the “Scene Setting” screen
(p.142) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can also register and recall SCENE 1-4 with the SCENE key on the unit’s front
panel.
To select a desired SCENE name, press ENTER.
Y
Registering a scene
• To cancel the operation of selecting a registered scene, press RETURN.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
• The operation is canceled automatically when you have not operated the unit
VOLUME
for the 30 seconds.
ENHANCER
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and
sound program) that you want to assign to a scene.
By default, the following input settings are registered for each scene.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
2
Main Zone, Zone2 and Zone3
TUNING
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Input
AV1
TUNER
AUDIO2
NET RADIO
SCENE
5
6
7
8
Input
AV2
AV3
AUDIO 1
SERVER
Hold down the desired numbered key (1-8) until “SET
Complete (Setting Complete)” appears on the front
display and on the TV.
SCENE1
SET Complete
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
• You can configure more detailed scene assignments in “Scene Setting” in the “Setup”
menu. For details, see “Scene Setting” (p.142).
• You can change the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV. For
details, see “Scene Rename” (p.142).
En
75
Selecting the sound mode
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround
X
decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the
HDMI OUT
sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
Enabling SURROUND:AI.
5
6
7
8
• Press AI.
NET
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Information” screen in
This mode lets you enjoy the optimum surround effect according to AI
INPUT
TUNER
analysis as well as a compelling sense of realism (p.77).
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies and music
BLUE
• Press PROGRAM repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies and games, as well as for listening to
music sources or for stereo playback.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
PROGRAM
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
BAND
“Sound” menu (p.136).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
TUNING
the “Sound” menu (p.136).
Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos®
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in
the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as
Dolby Atmos.)
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
Selecting a surround decoder
Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™
• Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.81).
• When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue
sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.
• When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as
Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.81).
Enabling Pure Direct
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.82).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and
breadth (p.82).
En
76
Playing back with surround effects
optimized for the scene (SURROUND:AI)
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP HD3)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
With SURROUND:AI, the AI incorporated in the DSP creates the optimal
HDMI OUT
surround effect for the scene of the content.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
YELLOW
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
such as “dialogue”, “background music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD3). It allows you to
effects” as well as optimized in real time to create a compelling sense of
easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in
realism.
your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
1
PRESET
RED
Scenes are instantaneously analyzed with a focus on sound elements
BLUE
Sound program category
Press AI.
MUSIC
Each time you press the key, SURROUND:AI is enabled or disabled.
Y
HD 3
• When PURE DIRECT is enabled, SURROUND:AI is not available.
• When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the straight decode mode, PROGRAM key and the
surround decoders are not available.
TOP
MENU
HOME
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up
surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front
presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence
VOLUME
speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence
speakers for further spatial sounds) (p.141).
ENHANCER
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
STRAIGHT
surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front
MEMORY
TUNING
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOL.
X
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
CLASSICAL
Hall in Vienna
BAND
presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.141).
TUNING
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using
the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field (p.141).
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
77
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
ENTERTAINMENT
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and
light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices
are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is
realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a
suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games.
The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are
right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic
and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds
depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background
music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this
program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more
spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you
were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to
the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that
emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that
reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of
an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic
positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the
inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of
opera entertainment.
programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without
disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio. Its design is
based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is
surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions.
It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and
boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds
to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest
Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created
virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects,
and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure
movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on
reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space
expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and
powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the
separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie
genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are
modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are
reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the
dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an
atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space
with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original
audio.
Enhanced
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the dynamic sound transition
of 3D object audio. Its design is based on the concept of a movie theater with
multi-top speakers, in which the audience is overwhelmed by the natural and
powerful sound effects.
En
78
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
LIVE/CLUB
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling
makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete
walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey
atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you
feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los
Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous
New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that
uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread
richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox
shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich
sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed
tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling
enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus,
the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of
the church.
STEREO
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a
beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of
Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience
hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly
music and chamber music.
En
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output
from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
9ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then
outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field
and is ideal for background music at parties.
Y
CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.77) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.80) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.
79
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround
speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to
reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo
field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to
headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound
enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
program or a surround decoder.
X
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you
can place them in the front (p.24) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual
CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the
virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
X
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
80
Enjoying unprocessed playback
PARTY
T
Press SUR. DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes.
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
1
processing.
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
SUR. DECODE
†‡ Dsur
HDMI OUT
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo
Uses the decoder automatically selected by input
source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS
sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected
for other sources.
bDsur
Dolby Surround decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.
Neural:X
DTS Neural:X decoder. Expands the sound using a
method optimized for the layout of the installed
speakers. It produces the extended surround sound
optimized for your speaker system. A real acoustic
space (including overhead) will be created especially
when objectbased audio (such as DTS:X content) is
played.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
1
BLUE
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled
or disabled.
STRAIGHT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Y
AI
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE
speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.81).
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
FRONT (p.80) works when multichannel source is played back.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
■ Playing back in extended multichannel
(surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Auto
sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and
INPUT
VOL.
Y
• When the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is selected, virtual surround
X
processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.80) does not work.
• We recommend Dolby Surround while network streaming is Dolby contents.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and
the selected decode type (p.137).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.175).
En
81
• The Neural:X decoder does not work with Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD signals.
Select “Auto” or “bDsur” for these signals.
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(Pure Direct)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
When Pure Direct is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with
Playing back digitally compressed formats
(such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound
(Compressed Music Enhancer)
the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other
SCENE
circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
quality.
1
INPUT
TUNER
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before
Press PURE DIRECT.
it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound
Each time you press the key, Pure Direct is enabled or disabled.
BLUETOOTH
USB
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound,
PURE DIRECT
BLUE
modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
VOL.
L
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when
R
“Hi-Res Mode” (p.122) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default).
Y
When Pure Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Selecting sound programs
1
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is
– Operating the Setup menu and “Option” menu
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
enabled or disabled.
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
ENHANCER
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
STRAIGHT
Y
MEMORY
BAND
Enhancer On
Hi-Res ENHANCER
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Press ENHANCER.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
TUNING
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
– DSD audio
X
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.122) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
En
82
Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio
Setting the frequency steps
stations.
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Y
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used.
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.
on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
4
5
En
83
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
2
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
preset numbers.
X
VOL.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.93).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
TUNER
3
PRESET
PRESET
RED
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
FM 87.50MHz
Registering favorite radio stations
(presets)
YELLOW
BLUE
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
■ Registering a radio station manually
automatically.
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.84) to
tune into the desired radio station.
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
TOP
MENU
HOME
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
X
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
2
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
number.
see “Video Out” (p.123).
Preset number
TUNING
Preset
BAND
TUNING
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
En
84
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
YELLOW
Cursor keys
ENTER
4
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
■ Clearing preset stations
Y
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
RETURN
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
VOLUME
2
3
4
5
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
VOL.
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
ENHANCER
TUNING
01:FM 98.50MHz
STEREO TUNED
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
AI
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
TOP
MENU
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Preset
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
OPTION
1
2
station.
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
BLUE
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
Press OPTION.
X
PRESET
PRESET
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
■ Selecting a preset station
TUNING
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
6
En
85
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
2
3
4
5
Listening to DAB radio (Australia,
U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia
models only)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound
and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also
receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations
Press OPTION.
using MPEG-4 audio codec (AAC+), which has a more efficient
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
transmission method.
Y
• The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
• Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check
WorldDAB online at http://www.worlddab.org/.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
X
For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.49).
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
En
86
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
Preparing the DAB tuning
Selecting a DAB radio station for reception
Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to
You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial
perform an initial scan.
scan.
HDMI OUT
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
RED
GREEN
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
The following message appears on the front panel if you have not
INPUT
TUNER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
BLUETOOTH
USB
performed an initial scan yet.
TUNER
Init Scan
Press [ENTER]
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
3
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
available.
• When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.
VOL.
Secondary station
DAB 2
BBC National
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
DAB
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
STRAIGHT
X
You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
MEMORY
BAND
BBC Radio 4
Daily Service
• “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.
Y
first DAB radio station as stored in station order.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
DAB
When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the
AI
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
VOL.
Press ENTER to start an initial scan.
Init Scan
>>>------- 30%
1
2
3
X
TUNING
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.123) in the “Option” menu.
• If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1
BAND
TUNING
appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again.
• You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.90).
• To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored,
select “Init Scan” (p.119) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan
again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will
be cleared.
En
87
Registering favorite DAB radio stations
(presets)
■ Selecting a preset DAB radio station
Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE
preset numbers.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
X
You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.
1
2
3
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
PRESET
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
1
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
■ Clearing preset DAB radio stations
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
number.
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Preset number
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
STRAIGHT
BAND
“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Y
(p.87) to tune into the desired DAB radio station.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
AI
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception”
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
PRESET:01
Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.
2
HOME
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio
■ Registering a DAB radio station as presets
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
station.
INPUT
RED
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Preset
BAND
01:BBC Radio 4
Preset OK
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
2
3
4
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset DAB radio station to
the desired DAB radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
be cleared and press ENTER.
press MEMORY again.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
in-use preset number is displayed.
“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)
Preset
02:Empty
BBC Radio 4
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
En
88
5
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
■ Clearing all preset DAB radio stations
Displaying the DAB information
Clear all the DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
RED
GREEN
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
2
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
HOME
1
2
Tune into the desired DAB radio station.
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Info
Program Type
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
displayed item appears.
DAB
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Classic FM
Classic Music
AI
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
VOL.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
“Option” menu closes automatically.
TOP
MENU
into a DAB radio station.
BAND
TUNING
DLS
(Dynamic Label
Segment)
Information on the current station
Ensemble Label
Ensemble name
Program Type
Station genre
Date And Time
Current date and time
Audio Mode
Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate
CH Label/Freq.
Channel label and frequency
Signal Quality
Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
X
Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio
station.
En
89
Checking reception strength of each DAB
channel label
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to
HDMI OUT
100 [best]).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
1
2
3
4
5
Press BAND to select the DAB band.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select the desired DAB channel
label.
Tune AID
12B Level: 80
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
DAB channel label
VOLUME
ENHANCER
6
STRAIGHT
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Reception strength
To exit from the menu, press RETURN.
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
BAND
En
90
■ DAB frequency information
The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.
Frequency
Channel label
Frequency
Channel label
174.928 MHz
5A
225.648 MHz
12B
176.640 MHz
5B
227.360 MHz
12C
178.352 MHz
5C
229.072 MHz
12D
180.064 MHz
5D
230.784 MHz
13A
181.936 MHz
6A
232.496 MHz
13B
183.648 MHz
6B
234.208 MHz
13C
185.360 MHz
6C
235.776 MHz
13D
187.072 MHz
6D
237.488 MHz
13E
188.928 MHz
7A
239.200 MHz
13F
190.640 MHz
7B
192.352 MHz
7C
194.064 MHz
7D
195.936 MHz
8A
197.648 MHz
8B
199.360 MHz
8C
201.072 MHz
8D
202.928 MHz
9A
204.640 MHz
9B
206.352 MHz
9C
208.064 MHz
9D
209.936 MHz
10A
211.648 MHz
10B
213.360 MHz
10C
215.072 MHz
10D
216.928 MHz
11A
218.640 MHz
11B
220.352 MHz
11C
222.064 MHz
11D
223.936 MHz
12A
En
91
Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting
HDMI OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the DAB/FM
antennas.
INPUT
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
Selecting a frequency for reception
from registered radio stations.
SCENE
BLUETOOTH
USB
1
2
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band.
TUNER
FM 87.50MHz
PRESET
YELLOW
VOL.
BLUE
3
Press TUNING to set a frequency.
Hold down the key for about a second to search stations
automatically.
TOP
MENU
HOME
FM 98.50MHz
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
STEREO TUNED
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
VOLUME
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
ENHANCER
X
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
• You can switch between “Stereo” and “Monaural” for FM radio reception in “FM
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Mode” (p.124) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio
station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
BAND
TUNING
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio. For details
see “Video Out” (p.123).
En
92
Registering favorite FM radio stations
(presets)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have
HDMI OUT
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
SCENE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NET
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “FM
Auto Preset” (p.85).
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
TUNER
PRESET
PRESET
RED
Preset function.
X
INPUT
YELLOW
BLUE
X
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are registered automatically by the Auto
preset numbers.
1
TUNER
■ Registering radio stations automatically
(FM Auto Preset)
■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
2
3
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.92) to
keys or PRESET to select a preset number.
4
Hold down MEMORY for seconds.
station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter,
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty
ENHANCER
(unused) preset number after the most recently registered
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
number.
Preset number
TUNING
BAND
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK
To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
Y
The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio
AI
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor
tune into the desired radio station.
2
Press OPTION.
X
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “Finished” appears at the
“Preset” screen and the “Option” menu closes automatically.
■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into
the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then
press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
1
2
3
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
Press BAND to select the FM band
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:Empty
FM 98.50MHz
Preset
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
STEREO TUNED
01:FM 98.50MHz
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
En
93
■ Clearing preset stations
■ Clearing all preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
Clear all the radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
1
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
TUNER
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
2
3
4
5
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
6
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select a preset station to be cleared
2
3
4
5
Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select “Clear All Preset”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Execute” and press ENTER.
and press ENTER.
If all the preset stations are cleared, “CLEAR ALL” appears and the
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next
“Option” menu closes automatically.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
VOLUME
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
currently selected is displayed on the front display.
ENHANCER
TUNING
1
“TUNER” is selected as the input source and the frequency
in-use preset number is displayed.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
TUNING
En
94
Radio Data System tuning
Program Service
Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting
DSP Program
Sound mode name
station.
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
(U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The
unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Y
■ Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station
does not provide the Radio Data System service.
Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.
X
We recommend using “FM Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.93).
2
Press INFO on the front panel.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
STEREO TUNED
Info
Program Type
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
STEREO TUNED
FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
En
95
Playing back music via Bluetooth
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
smartphones) on the unit.
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and
play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
The unit
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
Y
The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
BLUE
Y
• Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly.
1
source.
For details, see “Preparing the wireless antenna” (p.51).
X
For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
2
HOME
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
made.
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
3
STRAIGHT
BAND
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is
MEMORY
TUNING
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of
the unit) from the available device list.
(p.179).
TOP
MENU
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
displayed on the TV.
X
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically
connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth
connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Bluetooth” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
En
96
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.
Connecting a USB storage device
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).
X
1
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)
PROGRAM
ENTER
RETURN
HELP
PHONES
USB
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
USB storage device
USB
Connected
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
X
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears
in the front display.
Y
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.
• The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.
En
97
Playback of USB storage device contents
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
displayed.
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
BLUETOOTH
USB
USB
PRESET
GREEN
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
and start playback.
1
INPUT
RED
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents
TV screen.
1
NET
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the
SCENE
TUNER
2
YELLOW
BLUE
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen,
Cursor keys
ENTER
hold down RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
X
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
AI
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
TUNING
En
98
■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
b
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
■ Playback screen
HDMI OUT
a
d
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
b
c
INPUT
GREEN
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.100).
PRESET
RED
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
BLUETOOTH
USB
YELLOW
b Contents list
BLUE
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
d Operation menu
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
Menu
AI
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
VOLUME
1 Page Down
ENHANCER
Now Playing
STRAIGHT
BAND
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
MEMORY
TUNING
Function
1 Page Up
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP
MENU
b Playback information
10 Pages Down
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
En
99
control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage
device contents.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION.
2
NET
RED
GREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
BLUETOOTH
USB
X
PRESET
YELLOW
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
BLUE
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
VOLUME
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
Function
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Repeat
(Repeat)
TUNING
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
100
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
You can play back music files stored on your media servers on the unit.
Y
■ For a PC or a NAS with other media server software
installed
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.51). You can check whether
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.146) in the
settings.
“Setup” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network
connection.
X
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or media servers, first you need to configure the
media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
The setting procedure may vary depending on the PC and Windows Media Player version (The
following procedure is a setup example for Windows Media Player 12).
1
2
3
4
5
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name.
Click “OK” to exit.
X
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
En
101
Playback of PC music contents
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is
playback.
displayed.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
INPUT
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
YELLOW
BLUE
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To return to the top screen during menu operations on the browse screen, hold down
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
X
during playback, playback stops automatically.
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
AI
playback screen is displayed.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
2
ENHANCER
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press
ENTER.
STRAIGHT
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
VOLUME
TUNING
En
102
■ Browse screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
b
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
■ Playback screen
HDMI OUT
a
d
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
b
c
INPUT
a Status indicators
a Status indicators
BLUETOOTH
USB
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.84), playback status (such as
play/pause) and elapsed time.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.104).
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
b Contents list
BLUE
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER to confirm the selection.
Cursor keys
ENTER
HOME
d Operation menu
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, h, j, f, g) on the
Menu
AI
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
VOLUME
ENHANCER
Now Playing
MEMORY
BAND
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
STRAIGHT
TUNING
Function
1 Page Up
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
c Item number/total
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TOP
MENU
b Playback information
10 Pages Down
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
En
103
remote control to control playback.
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPTION.
2
NET
RED
GREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle/Repeat” and press
ENTER.
INPUT
TUNER
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press
BLUETOOTH
USB
X
PRESET
YELLOW
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
BLUE
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
3
“Repeat” (Repeat) and select a setting.
Item
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
VOLUME
Setting
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current
album (folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
Function
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
Repeat
(Repeat)
TUNING
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
104
Listening to Internet radio
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.51). You can check
SCENE
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to
1
2
3
4
the unit in “Information” (p.146) in the “Network” menu.
5
6
7
8
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
NET
GREEN
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input
source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
NET
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
BLUETOOTH
USB
• Folder names are different depending on the language.
PRESET
RED
1
• The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.
INPUT
TUNER
Playback of Internet radio
Y
HDMI OUT
YELLOW
BLUE
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
2
RETURN
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
playback screen is displayed.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.116).
En
105
■ Browse screen
■ Playback screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
a
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
c
b
b
INPUT
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
a Playback indicator
a Contents list
BLUETOOTH
USB
BLUE
b Item number/total
Displays the station name, album name and song title.
c Operation menu
Cursor keys
ENTER
Use the cursor keys to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
HOME
Function
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
1 Page Down
AI
Now Playing
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
Moves to the playback screen.
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
ENHANCER
10 Pages Down
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
X
When “Video Out” in the “Option” menu is set to except “Off”, you can close the browse
screen by pressing the left cursor key. To display the browse screen again, press any
cursor key. For details on see “Video Out” (p.123).
En
X
• You can use the playback operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
1 Page Up
TOP
MENU
Displays the elapsed time.
b Playback information
106
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (Favorites)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Favorites”, you
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
can quickly access to them from the “Favorites” folder in the browse
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
screen.
X
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input
source as shortcuts (p.116).
INPUT
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
OPTION
1
screen or start playback of it to display the playback
screen.
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
2
3
Use the cursor key to select “Add to favorites” and press
The selected station is added to the “Favorites” folder.
Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “S”.
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
BAND
Press OPTION.
ENTER.
VOLUME
ENHANCER
TUNING
Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse
Browse screen
TUNING
X
To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select
“Remove from favorites”.
En
107
Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
(wired or wireless)
1
Router
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen
on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.
iTunes (example)
(wired or wireless)
iOS (example)
The unit
iPhone/iPad/iPod touch
Y
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
Y
2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether
the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.146) in
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network
name of the unit) as the audio output device.
the “Setup” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect.
3
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
Select a song and start playback.
X
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
X
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby”
(p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name”
(p.149) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from
iTunes/iPod, set “AirPlay Volume Interlock” (p.148) in the “Network” menu to “Off”.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could
result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop
playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately.
En
108
■ Playback screen
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
a
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
RED
GREEN
INPUT
a Playback indicator
BLUETOOTH
USB
Displays the elapsed/remaining time.
PRESET
YELLOW
b Playback information
BLUE
Displays the artist name, album name and song title.
X
You can use the playback operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote
control to control playback.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
Playback operation
keys
En
109
Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the
■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms
unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).
You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can
listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
(Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).
Video (HDMI)
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each
zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we
Guest room
(Zone2)
recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center
about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
■ Enjoying music in other rooms
Connections
TV: p.112
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Video/audio (HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.39
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.111
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.112
En
110
Preparing the multi zone system
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and
Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.
connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Caution
The unit (rear)
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
• Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with
the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short
circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
AV 1
AV 2
(1 MOVIE)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks
1
ARC
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
VIDEO
B AV 2
(5 STB)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(3 MUSIC)
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
L
(F
L
R
R
2 OPTICAL
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
R
SURROUND
FRONT
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
DIO 4
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies
(R
SUB
R SURROUND
ZONE 2 /
F.PRESENSE
ZONE 3 /
R.PRESENSE
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
L
75ȍ
FM
AM
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
L
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
R
“Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.39).
AUDIO
Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Y
(RX-A3080 only)
You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front
presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external
amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio.
X
You can adjust the volume for Zone2 and Zone3 output with the unit. When using an external amplifier with
volume control, set “Volume” (p.150) in the “Setup” menu to “Fixed”.
En
111
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in another room
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
(Zone4).
Y
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the
unit with an HDMI cable (p.45).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
• The “Setup” menu and “Option” menu cannot be used with Zone2 or Zone4, but browsing or play back are
possible with a network, USB or Bluetooth connection in Zone2.
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI OUT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(HDCP2.2)
HDMI
(HDCP2.2)
NETWORK
(4 NET)
(8 SERVER)
3
3
(ZONE OUT)
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
L
2
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone4
To assign the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”
(p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.
En
112
■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied
remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting
remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT
the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
AV 2
VIE)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
(1 MOVIE)
(5 STB)
(6 GAME)
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
HDMI OUT
AV 7
(5 STB)
AV 3
(6 GAME)
AV 4
TRIGGER
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
A AV 1
(1 MOVIE)
PR
1
PB
IN
OUT
2
IN
OUT
(FRONT)
1
PRE OUT
R
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
L
2
ZONE 2/
ZONE 3/
F.PRESENCE R.PRESENCE
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
(REAR)
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R SURROUND BACK
L
R
EXTRA SP2
R.PRESENCE
L
CENTER
ANTENNA
(2 RADIO)
FM
OUT
PR
ZONE OUT/PRE OUT
5ȍ
OUT
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
(5 STB)
6 OPTICAL
IN
3
Y
5 COAXIAL
REMOTE
IN
(ZONE OUT)
B AV 2
AXIAL
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
(HDCP2.2)
1
ARC
REMOTE
AM
Remote control
ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
Main zone
En
113
Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4
MAIN/ZONE
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
z
ZONE
ZON
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the corresponding
Press z (receiver power).
pages.
2
3
4
Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or
5
6
7
8
disabled.
NET
PRESET
RED
GREEN
indicator lights up in the front display.
BLUETOOTH
USB
YELLOW
BLUE
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input source.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected
for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to
AI
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.97)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.105)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music with AirPlay (p.108)
Y
“SERVER”.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Russia models only) (p.92)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.101)
“Multi-zone output” (p.181).
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
• Listening to FM radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.96)
• Audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you
HOME
• Listening to DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models only) (p.86)
Y
TOP
MENU
• Listening to FM/AM radio (except Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models) (p.83)
When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone
Input selection keys
TUNER
Start playback on the external device or select a radio
station.
Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.
1
INPUT
4
AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in
VOLUME
the main zone.
ENHANCER
X
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone3/Zone3 input.
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.115).
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
En
114
SLEEP
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
PARTY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SCENE
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
GREEN
The following functions are also available when the zone you want to
The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that
operate is enabled.
is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo
Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
party.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
INPUT
NET
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function
SCENE
TUNER
■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4
YELLOW
BLUE
1
Press PARTY.
Press SCENE 1-8.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off.
X
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold
display.
down the desired SCENE1-8 key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display.
(Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)
X
You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.152)
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Setting the sleep timer
in the “Setup” menu.
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
Y
off).
Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
AI
Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
VOLUME
enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
ENHANCER
Press ENHANCER.
MUTE
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
ENHANCER
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
X
Depending on the “Remote Key” (p.154) setting, the PROGRAM Key may be also
available in Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
En
115
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
HDMI OUT
shortcut numbers.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
X
• You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.107).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
BLUETOOTH
USB
GREEN
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
PRESET
PRESET
RED
Recalling a registered item
input source as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the
PURE DIRECT
YELLOW
BLUE
contents cannot be registered.
1
2
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
Press PRESET to select a desired content.
Recall Preset
01:USB
Registering an item
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Y
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
TOP
MENU
HOME
1
2
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
Memory Preset
01:Empty
VOLUME
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
MEMORY
MEMORY
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or
To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET
TUNING
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit
X
STRAIGHT
BAND
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the
network.
Shortcut number (flashes)
ENHANCER
TUNING
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the
unit.
Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.
AI
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file
correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
• The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list
Memory Preset
02:Empty
and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.73) on your mobile device.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
116
Viewing the current status
Currently input
source
You can view the current status (input or DSP program currently selected) on the front panel
AV 1-7
display or TV.
AUX
AUDIO 1-4*1
Item
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)
PHONO
Switching information on the front display
1
(AM radio feature is not available on the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and
Russia models)
TUNER (FM/AM)
Press INFO on the front panel to select between the various display items.
Info
Audio Decoder
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)
* (U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data
System broadcasting station (p.95).
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
TUNER (DAB)
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.89) for details.
Item name
Bluetooth
About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears.
AV1
†‡ Dsur
USB
SERVER
VOL.
AirPlay
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR
Information
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address), Ethernet
MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program
(sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address (IP address),
Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
MusicCast Link
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2), IP Address
(IP address), Ethernet MAC (Ethernet MAC address), Wi-Fi MAC (Wi-Fi MAC address)
X
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*2)
to each input source group.
*1
AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
*2 The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is
activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
117
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
2
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
PURE DIRECT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TUNER
NET
X
When SURROUND:AI is enabled, the status information for SURROUND:AI is also
BLUETOOTH
USB
displayed.
PRESET
GREEN
Use the cursor keys to select “On-screen Information”
and press ENTER.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
INPUT
RED
Press OPTION.
YELLOW
BLUE
Input source/
CINEMA DSP/
Party mode status ENHANCER status
Volume/YPAO
Volume status
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
AI
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
PROGRAM
ENHANCER
Audio format
Decoder
Sound mode
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
BAND
TUNING
3
To close the information display, press RETURN.
Y
• You can use the PROGRAM key on the remote control for displaying the status
information on the TV. For details, see “PROGRAM Key” (p.154).
• Use the left/right cursor keys to display other informations in the “Setup”
menu on the TV.
En
118
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is
Option menu items
available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings
X
during playback.
1
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Press OPTION.
• When the input icon is displayed on the upper right of the “Option” menu, the setting is applied to the currently
selected input source. Otherwise, the setting is applied to all of the input sources.
Front display
Option
Tone Control
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
• Default settings are underlined.
VOL.
L C R
SL SW1 SW
SR
SBL
SBR
Item
TV screen
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Dialogue
(Dialog)
X
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
120
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is
adjusted.
121
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
121
DTS Dialogue
Control
(DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X
contents.
121
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
121
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
121
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
122
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
122
Input Trim
(In. Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
122
Subwoofer Trim
(SW. Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
122
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
122
Selects the audio signal to be played back.
123
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
En
119
Page
120
Lipsync
(Lipsync)
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
Function
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and
low-frequency range individually.
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Item
Video Mode
(V.M)
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Function
Enables/disables the video signal processing settings
configured in the “Setup” menu.
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
Video Out
(V. Out)
Selects a video to be output with the selected audio
source.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configure the shuffle setting for playback.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configure the repeat setting for playback.
FM Mode
(Mode)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.
124
FM Auto Preset
(FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.
124
Clear Preset
(Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
124
Clear All Preset
(ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset
numbers.
124
Add to favorites
(Add to Fav.)
Adds your favorite Internet radio station to
the“Favorites” folder.
124
Remove from favorites
(RemovefromFav.)
Removes it from the “Favorites” folder.
124
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
87
Shuffle / Repeat
(Shuffle/Repeat)
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
Preset
(Preset)
Init Scan
(Init Scan)
Tune AID
(Tune AID)
On-screen Information
(On-screen Info)
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually.
123
Video
Adjustment
(Video Adjust)
Video Out
(Video Out)
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Page
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
123
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments
123
Y
• When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.
-
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
-
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency
levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural
sounds even at low volume.
Settings
Enables YPAO Volume.
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “YPAO” have been already saved (p.55).
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at
night.
90
Checks reception strength of each DAB channel label.
Displays the current status information.
Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)
X
Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models
only)
Off (Off)
124
En
120
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from
below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting.
the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low
volume at night.
X
Settings
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are
used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.77) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
volume.
On
Off
Volume: high
Output level
Output level
Volume: low
Ideal position
On
Input level
Off
Input level
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can
turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
X
This setting is available only when “Delay Enable” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Enable” (default).
Setting range
0 to 3
X
This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder
is working.
DTS Dialogue Control (DTS Dialog)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS:X contents.
Setting range
0 to 6
X
This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back.
En
121
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Configures the input settings.
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences
X
when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82).
Settings
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■ Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Y
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the
– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz
subwoofer.
– DSD audio
Settings
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is
set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel
PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings
Enables the high-resolution mode.
On (On)
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal
processing condition.)
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
En
122
Off (Off)
Disables Extra Bass.
On (On)
Enables Extra Bass.
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects the audio signal to be played back.
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.144)
in the “Setup” menu.
Audio Select (A.Sel)
X
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
source.
Settings
1 to 6
Settings
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
Auto (Auto)
1. HDMI input
■ Video Out (V.Out)
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
Settings
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input
through the HDMI jack.
COAX/OPT
(COAX/OPT)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are
input through the AUDIO jacks.
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
AV 1-7 (AV1-7)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
■ Shuffle / Repeat (Shuffle/Repeat)
Configures the Shuffle settings or repeat settings.
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured
Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).
in “Resolution” and “Aspect” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode (V.M)
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order.
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments)
settings configured in “Processing” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
Repeat (Repeat)
Settings
Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.97) or media server (p.101).
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
Settings
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Off (Off)
En
123
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
■ Remove from favorites (RemovefromFav.)
Switches between the reception settings for FM radio.
Remove an Internet radio station from the “Favorites” folder.
FM Mode (Mode)
■ Init Scan (Init Scan)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Initiate Scan specifies the initial settings in order to receive DAB radio. If this operation is not
Settings
performed, not all DAB-related functions can be used.
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Monaural (Monaural)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
■ Tune AID (Tune AID)
From the “Tune Aid” menu , you can check the reception level of each channel.
■ Preset (Preset)
■ On-screen Information (On-screen Info)
Registers radio stations or clears preset stations.
Displays the current status information.
FM Auto Preset (FM Auto Preset)
Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets.
X
• You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets.
• (U.K., Europe, Russia and Middle East models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “FM Auto Preset”.
Clear Preset (Clear Preset)
Clears radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Clear All Preset (ClearAllPreset)
Clears all the radio stations registered to preset numbers.
Settings
Cancel
Cancels the unregistering of a radio station.
Execute
Removes all registered radio stations.
■ Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)
Register the currently playing Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder.
X
You can also register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents or Bluetooth input source as shortcuts (p.116).
En
124
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Perform the following basic procedure to operate the “Setup” menu. You can configure the
unit’s various functions with the “Setup” menu.
X
• If new firmware is available, the message screen appears.
• If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears at the lower of the “Setup” menu.
1
2
Press SETUP.
3
4
5
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
Press SETUP.
This completes the settings.
En
125
Setup menu items
Use the following table to configure various functions of the unit.
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
131
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
131
Selects a speaker system.
131
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
132
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
132
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
133
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
133
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
133
Rear Presence
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
133
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
134
Power Amp Assign
Configuration
Speaker
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
134
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
134
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
134
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
135
YPAO Result
Checks and Reloads the previous YPAO adjustments.
135
En
126
Menu
Item
Lipsync
DSP Parameter
Sound
Surround Decoder
9ch Stereo
136
Enables/disables the “Lipsync” adjustment configured in “Auto/Manual Select” in the “Setup” menu.
136
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
136
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
137
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
137
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
137
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
137
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
137
Reverb Time
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound.
137
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation.
138
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound.
138
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
138
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
138
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
138
Surround Back Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
138
Surround Back Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
138
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
139
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used in combination with the selected sound program.
139
Center Spread
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played.
139
Center Image
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field.
139
Level
Adjusts the entire volume.
139
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance.
139
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right volume balance.
139
Height Balance
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers.
139
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables monaural sound output.
140
Reset
Restores all default settings.
140
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
140
Max Volume
Sets the limit value of the volume.
140
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
140
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
140
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP 3D effect level when the volume is adjusted.
140
VPS
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.
141
VSBS
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
141
Adaptive DSP Level
Virtual Speaker
Page
Delay Enable
Dynamic Range
Volume
Function
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Information
Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (RX-A3080 only)
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
141
DAC Digital Filter (RX-A3080 only)
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).
141
Balance Input Attenuator (RX-A3080 only)
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input to avoid sound distortion.
141
En
127
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Scene Setting
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments.
Scene Rename
Renames the scene name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
142
142
Information
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
143
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing.
143
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals.
143
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals.
143
Adjustment
Configures the video adjustments.
144
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control.
145
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input.
145
ARC
Enables/disables ARC.
145
Standby Sync
Scene
Video Mode
Video/HDMI
HDMI Control
Network
Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit.
145
HDMI Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV.
145
HDMI ZONE OUT Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
145
HDCP Version
Selects the version of HDCP used on the HDMI input jacks.
146
HDMI Standby Through
Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
146
Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
146
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
147
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
147
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
147
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
148
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.
148
AirPlay Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay.
148
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
149
MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other
devices of the network.
149
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
149
Disconnect
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
150
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
150
Audio Receive
En
128
Menu
Item
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4
Information
Zone2
Multi Zone
Zone3
Function
Page
150
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
150
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 limit value of the volumes.
151
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
151
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2.
151
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
151
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone2 output.
151
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone2 output.
151
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 output.
151
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone2 output.
151
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone3 output.
150
Max Volume
Sets the Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
151
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
151
Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone3.
151
Monaural
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone3 output.
151
Enhancer
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer for Zone3 output.
151
Tone Control
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-frequency range for Zone3 output.
151
Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone3 output.
151
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the volume balance for Zone3 output.
151
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the TV screen.
152
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
152
En
129
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
152
Language
Selects an on-screen menu language.
152
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
153
Input Skip
Sets which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT key.
153
Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
153
Auto Play
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet radio services.
154
Sets which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.
154
PROGRAM Key
Sets the function for the PROGRAM key on the remote control.
154
Color Key
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.
155
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
155
Volume
Switches the scale of the volume display.
155
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
155
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV screen.
155
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack to function.
156
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 1 jack functions are synchronized.
156
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack to function.
156
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT 2 jack functions are synchronized.
156
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
157
ECO Mode
DSP Skip
Remote Key
System
Display Set
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
ECO
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
157
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
157
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
158
En
130
Speaker
■ Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
X
Default settings are underlined.
Pattern1 ▶ 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 ▶ 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers
(with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply
bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance your system.
■ Setting Pattern
Settings
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Basic
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the
selected pattern.
7.2 +1Zone
• Measurement results (YPAO)
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel
plus rear presence speakers) (p.21).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2).
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
7.2.2 +1Zone
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
• Distance
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
• Level
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system in the main zone (p.32).
7.2 +2Zone
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
(RX-A3080 only)
7.2.4 [ext.RP]
X
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the center of the diagram on the right side of the screen.
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including rear presence channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.33).
(RX-A3080 only)
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
7.2.4 [ext.Front]
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you
can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front channel
expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
(RX-A3080 only)
7.2.4 [ext.FP+RP]
7.2.2 [ext.Front]
+1Zone
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including front presence and
rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.34).
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
En
131
■ Configuration
Select this option when you use Zone2 and Zone3 speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including front channel expansion using an external amplifier) in the
7.2 [ext.Front] +2Zone main zone (p.35).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 and EXTRA SP 2 jacks
(default: Zone2 for EXTRA SP 1, Zone3 for EXTRA SP 2).
7.2 Bi-Amp
5.2.2 Bi-Amp
7.2 Bi-Amp +1Zone
7.2.4 Bi-Amp
[ext.FP+RP]
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
X
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or
Select this option when you use the 7.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”) as a guide.
• When the speaker size is set to “Small”, you can configure the “Crossover”. Frequency sounds lower than the
Select this option when you use the 5.2.2 system including bi-amp front speakers
(p.36).
specified value will be output from the subwoofer and higher will be output from the corresponding speakers.
Front
Select this option when you use Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers in addition to the 7.2
system (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone (p.37).
You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone2).
Selects the size of the front speakers.
(RX-A3080 only)
Settings
Select this option when you use the 7.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers,
and front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external
amplifier) (p.37).
Large
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
(RX-A3080 only)
5.2.4 Bi-Amp [ext.RP]
Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option when you use the 5.2.4 system including bi-amp front speakers
and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier) (p.38).
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than
the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
X
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
None
En
132
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Front Presence
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes and layout.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size and layout.
Settings
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Select this option for small speakers.
Small
None
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency
components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Layout Settings
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side
wall.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP
works when you select a sound program.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence
speakers.
Layout Settings
Rear
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the
room.
X
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the
room.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT works in this case.
Rear Presence
X
Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.
This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Settings
Surround Back
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
Settings
None
Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
Large
Small
None
Layout Settings
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel
frequency components.
Rear Height
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the rear side wall.
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
Overhead
Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear presence
speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency
(default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
X
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.
X
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”.
En
133
■ Level
Subwoofer
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack
and its phase.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Settings
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other
channels.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Use
None
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both
“Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.
Manual
X
Left + Right
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the
room.
Front + Rear
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the
room.
Monaural x2
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front
speakers.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
X
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “YPAO”
have already been saved (p.55). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.
X
This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from
“Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front
Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
En
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Layout settings
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
134
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
■ Test Tone
1
2
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Settings
X
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or
equalizer.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “YPAO” (p.55) to the “Manual” fields for fine
adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
■ YPAO Result
You can check the previous YPAO adjustments (“Wiring”, “Size”, “Distance”, “Level”, “Angle
Use the cursor keys to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer).
(horizontal)” and “Height”) in “YPAO Result”.
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, you can discard the
manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
5
1
2
3
To fine-adjust the center frequency, Q factor (bandwidth) or gain, use the cursor keys to select
an item.
Freq.: Use the cursor keys to adjust the center frequency of the selected band.
Q: Use the cursor keys to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band.
Gain: Use the cursor keys to adjust the gain of the selected band.
Setting range
Center frequency: 15.6 Hz to 16.0 kHz (15.6 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
6
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
135
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload”.
Press ENTER.
Press SETUP.
Sound
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Configures the audio output settings.
Delay Enable
■ Information
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*
Choices
Format
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Audio format of the input signal
Settings
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
Channel
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels,
2 surround channels, and LFE).
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Input
Output
Auto/Manual Select
(When DTS:X content is played back)
For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for
overhead speaker channels”.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Setting range
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Channel
The number of signal output channels (for example, “5.1.2”
denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker
channels”) and the speaker terminals from which signals are
output
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that
supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio
output manually.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
X
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
Y
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En
136
Adjustment
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation.
to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
“Auto”.
Setting range
1 ms to 99 ms
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field.
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
X
Y
• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
fine adjustment.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• This setting is also available in “Lipsync” (p.121) in the “Option” menu.
Liveness
■ DSP Parameter
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field.
Selects the sound program to change the settings of the sound program.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
DSP Level
Y
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
reduce it.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB
Reverb Time
Y
Adjusts the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. Higher to enrich the reverberant sound
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
and lower to have clear sound.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Setting range
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En
137
Reverb Delay
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. Higher to
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field.
enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms
Y
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Surround Liveness
Reverb Level
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field.
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
lower to weaken it.
Y
Setting range
0 % to 100 %
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Y
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Surround Back Initial Delay
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation.
Surround Initial Delay
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation.
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it.
Y
Setting range
1 ms to 49 ms
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Y
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Surround Back Room Size
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0.1 to 2.0 (higher to enhance the broadening effect)
Y
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
En
138
■ 9ch Stereo
Surround Back Liveness
Adjusting the volume settings.
Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field.
Setting range
0 to 10 (higher to enhance the reflectivity)
Level
Y
Adjusts the entire volume. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program.
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
Front / Rear Balance
■ Surround Decoder
Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to
Configures the surround decoders settings.
enhance the rear side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Decode Type
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
Selects a surround decoder to be used in combination with the selected sound program.
Left / Right Balance
Choices
Auto, bDsur, Neural:X, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
Adjusts the left and right volume balance. Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to
enhance the left side. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Center Spread
Setting range
-5 to 0 to 5
Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when a 2channel source
is played. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.
Height Balance
Settings
Off
Disables Center Spread.
Adjusts the height volume balance using the presence speakers. Higher to enhance the upside,
On
Enables Center Spread.
and lower to enhance the downside. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is selected.
Setting range
0 to 5 to 10
X
If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”.
X
Center Image
The presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.
Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this higher to
strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken it (more
broadening effect).This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
En
139
■ Volume
Monaural Mix
Setting the volume.
Enables/disables monaural sound output. This setting is effective when “9ch Stereo” is
selected.
Max Volume
Settings
Off
Disables monaural sound output.
On
Enables monaural sound output.
Sets the limit value of the volume.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
Reset
Initial Volume
Restores all default settings.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS
signals) playback.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments)
[0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
Settings
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
■ Pure Direct Mode
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.82).
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically
adjusted based on the input signal information.
Settings
Minimum/Auto
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected
input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is
selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
En
140
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results
and the volume level.
■ Virtual Speaker
Settings
Off
Setting Virtual Speaker.
Disables the jitter elimination function.
Enables the jitter elimination function.
VPS
Level 1, Level 2, Level 3
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio interruptions
on some playback devices depending on the audio clock conditions. In this case,
select lower level.
speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are
connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
■ DAC Digital Filter
presence speakers (p.77).
(RX-A3080 only)
Settings
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have favorite
Off
Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
On
Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).
sounds.
Settings
X
Sharp Roll-off Type
Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “Virtual
Presence Speaker” to “Off”.
Slow Roll-off Type
VSBS
Short Latency Type
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.
Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.
Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.
When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected.
■ Balance Input Attenuator
Settings
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
(RX-A3080 only)
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you can
avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.
X
Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V (RMS) or
VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.47).
■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Input source
AUDIO 4
(RX-A3080 only)
Settings
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Input source
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned), (network sources),
Bluetooth, USB
En
141
Bypass
Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.
ATT.(-6dB)
Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level (-6dB).
Scene
Video
Configures the scene settings.
■ Scene Setting
Video Mode (p.143), Video Adjustment (p.123)
Volume
Master Volume (p.74)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.121), Delay (p.136)
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.131), Parametric EQ (p.134)
Zone Interlock
Power (p.114), Input (p.150), Volume (p.150) *1
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently
*1 The “Volume” setting is not available with Zone4.
assigned to the selected scene.
X
X
To restore the default settings for the selected scene, select “Reset”.
The scene assignments can include radio stations, or the content on a selected USB storage device, Bluetooth
device, and network device.
■ Scene Rename
■ Procedure
Changes the SCENE name displayed on the front display or on the TV.
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER.
2
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press
■ Procedure
ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
1
Use the cursor keys to select the SCENE name and press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
Choices
HDMI Control
Control Sync (HDMI Control (p.145))
X
Input
Input (p.74), Audio Select (p.123)
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
[Input sources: TUNER, (network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB]
Registerd Content
3
Station, Music Content
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
[Input sources: others]
X
---
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.74)
Mode
DSP Program (p.78), Pure Direct Mode (p.140), Enhancer (p.151), Hi-Res Mode
(p.122), SURROUND:AI (p.77)
Sound
Tone Control (p.120), YPAO Volume (p.120), Adaptive DRC (p.121),
Extra Bass (p.122)
Surround
Dialogue Lift (p.121), Dialogue Level (p.121), Subwoofer Trim (p.122)
4
En
142
To exit from the menu, Press SETUP.
Video/HDMI
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Configures the video/HDMI settings.
Settings
■ Information
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Displays information about the current video signal and the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
jacks.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
Choices
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
HDMI Monitor
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
X
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.160) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV
normally.)
Aspect
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the
screen.
X
■ Video Mode
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p
(4K) signals.
Configures the video signal processing settings.
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).
Settings
Direct
Processing
Disables the video signal processing.
Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.
X
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce
video output delay.
En
143
Adjustment
Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.
Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register
the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
X
The video adjustments work on the video signals with 1080p or lower resolution.
Saturation
■ Setup procedure
Adjusts the video saturation.
1
2
Use the ENTER to select a preset number.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
3
Use the cursor keys to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Detail Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.
Setting range
0 to 50
Edge Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.
Setting range
0 to 50
Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100
En
144
■ HDMI Control
Standby Sync
Configures the HDMI control settings.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when
“HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
HDMI Control
Settings
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.181).
Settings
Off
On
Disables HDMI Control.
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is
receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
■ HDMI Audio Output
Y
Selects a device to output audio.
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.181) after connecting HDMI
X
Control-compatible devices.
The “HDMI OUT1” setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
TV Audio Input
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2, HDMI ZONE OUT
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set
to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack, HDMI OUT 2
switched to its built-in tuner.
jack or HDMI ZONE OUT.
Settings
AUDIO 1-3
Settings
Y
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an
external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
Y
The HDMI OUT 1-2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.183) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
■ HDMI ZONE OUT Assign
Settings
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Off
Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Settings
Zone2, Zone4
X
Y
For details on audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the
unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use
the TV’s speakers.
En
145
Network
■ HDCP Version
Selects the HDCP version of the HDMI input jacks for watching 4K video content.
Configures the network settings.
Input sources
AV 1-7
■ Information
Settings
Displays the network information on the unit.
Auto
Automatically sets the version of HDCP according to content.
1.4
Sets the version of HDCP to always be 1.4.
Choices
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
stand by mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys to
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
blinks).
MAC Address
(Ethernet)
MAC address
■ HDMI Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in
Settings
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the
power saving mode.
En
Network Name
Network name (the unit’s name on the network)
MusicCast Network
The status of the MusicCast network connection.
Wired/Wireless (Wi-Fi)
The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
146
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
■ Network Connection
3
Use the cursor keys to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Wired
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.51).
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless
router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a
wireless network” (p.68).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
4
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
5
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
6
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
7
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
■ Network Standby
Settings
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby).
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For
details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such
as IP address).
Settings
Off
On
IP Address
Disables the network standby function.
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Enables the network standby function.
Set the network parameters (such as IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway)
Auto
manually.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving
mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
■ Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “IP Address” and press ENTER.
With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not
more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.
En
147
■ MAC Address Filter
■ DMC Control
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Selects whether to allow a Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. A Digital Media
Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When
Filter
this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows
Media Player 12) on the same network.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1-10”, specify the MAC addresses
of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit.
Settings
X
AirPlay (p.108) and DMC (p.148) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
■ AirPlay Volume Interlock
MAC Address 1-10
Enables/disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. When other than “Off” is set,
you can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
Interlock
■ Procedure
Settings
1
Use the cursor keys to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to move the edit position and to select a value.
3
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
Off
Limited
Full
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
En
148
Disables volume control from iTunes/iPhone
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Enables volume control from iTunes/iPhone in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Bluetooth
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
Network Name
■ Setup procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename .
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.96).
Settings
X
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ MusicCast Link Power Interlock
Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (the unit)
also turns on the power of other devices of the network.
Settings
Off
Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
On
Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).
En
149
Off
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
Multi Zone
■ Audio Receive
Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver.
Configures the multi zone settings.
Disconnect
■ Information
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone) and
Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
the unit.
Choices
■ Procedure
1
Select “Disconnect” and press ENTER to terminate the Bluetooth connection.
X
This setting is not available when no Bluetooth devices are connected.
On/Off
Displays the status of each zone.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Volume
The volume setting for Zone2 and Zone3.
Tone Control
The tone control setting (the level of Treble and Bass) for Zone2 and Zone3.
Bluetooth Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices
(Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a
connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
Settings
Off
On
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ Zone2, Zone3 Set
X
Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.
This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.147) is set to “Off”.
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume
adjustment for the corresponding zone.
Settings
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
X
This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.131).
En
150
Max Volume
Enhancer
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 limit value of the volumes.
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.82) for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Setting range
-60.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [20.5 to 95.5 (5.0 increments), 97.0]
Settings
X
Off
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Tone Control
Initial Volume
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) for Zone2 or
Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Zone3 output.
Settings
Settings
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments) [0.5 to
97.0 (0.5 increments)].
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)
X
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Auto
Adjusts the levels of the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range
(Bass) automatically in synchronization with the main volume, with correction for
the auditory response of the human ear.
Manual
Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)
manually (-6.0 to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
Bypass
Does not adjust the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency
range (Bass).
Audio Delay
Extra Bass
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is synchronized with the
Enables/disables Extra Bass for Zone2 or Zone3 output. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can
video.
enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of speakers.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
Settings
Monaural
Off
Disables Extra Bass.
On
Enables Extra Bass.
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
Left / Right Balance
Settings
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Adjusts the front speaker balance for Zone2 or Zone3 output.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.
Setting range
-20 to 0 to +20 (negative to the left and positive to the right)
En
151
System
■ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Configures the system settings.
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select Zone, and then press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename.
■ Information
Displays the system information on the unit.
Choices
X
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit
Tuner Frequency Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
■ Language
Use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
Select an on-screen menu language.
X
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■ Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.115) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4
Settings
English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian, Chinese
Settings
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by
pressing PARTY on the remote control.
X
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
X
When party mode is being used, the Disable/Enable setting cannot be changed.
En
152
■ Input Assignment
■ Input Skip
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
Set which input sources are skipped when operating the INPUT key or AV CONTROLLER. You
can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.
Input Assignment
X
When using AV CONTROLLER, you cannot select the input sources set to “On” in this function.
■ Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (2) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “OPTICAL”, and press
ENTER.
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
Off
Does not skip the selected input source.
On
Skips the selected input source.
■ Input Rename (Auto)
Automatically changes the input source names displayed on the front display.You can select a
name created by the Auto Rename function.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “2” and press ENTER.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUDIO 1-3
■ Procedure
3
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
2
3
Use the cursor keys to select “Auto”.
4
Press SETUP.
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 2.
X
X
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
• When “Auto” is selected, the created name is saved even after the external device is disconnected. To reset to
the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” and then back to “Auto”.
• “Auto” can be selected for AUDIO 1-3 only if a digital “Input Assignment” setting is selected.
En
153
■ Input Rename (Manual)
■ DSP Skip
Allows the input source names displayed on the front display to be set manually.
Set which sound programs are skipped when operating the PROGRAM key.You can select the
desired sound program quickly by using this function.
Input sources
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Settings
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select an input source to be renamed.
2
Press ENTER.
Does not skip the selected sound program.
On
Skips the selected sound program.
■ Remote Key
Configures the Remote Key settings.
The cursor moves to the name edit screen.
3
Off
PROGRAM Key
Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
X
Sets the function that is assigned to the PROGRAM key on the remote control. You can use the
• To cancel the entry, select “CLEAR”.
PROGRAM key for other than DSP program selection.
• If you select “RESET”, the default input name will be inserted into the editing area.
Settings
4
To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5
Press SETUP.
Assign 1
Enables selecting the DSP Programs.
Enables selecting just the DSP Movie/Music Programs.
Assign 2
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Movie Programs.
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: toggle between the Music Programs
■ Auto Play
Assign 3
Enables selecting the NETWORK sources.
Enables/disables Auto Play function in Internet streaming services and following input
Assign 4
Enables moving to the previous/next page of the Browse Screen.
sources.
Assign 5
Enables fine-adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Input sources
(network sources), SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB
Assign 6
Enables adjusting the volume of dialogue sounds.
Settings
Assign 7
Off
Disables Auto Play function.
On
Starts automatically to play back the last content which you played back.
Auto
Starts automatically to play back the content which only you played back at
setting the unit to standby mode.
Enables selecting shuffle/repeat settings.
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: repeat
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: shuffle
Displays the front/on-screen display information.
Assign 8
The up key of the PROGRAM keys: front display information
The down key of the PROGRAM keys: on-screen display information
X
Y
This setting does not change the function of the PROGRAM key on the front panel.
In some input sources or content, you might not enable Auto Play function.
X
With some input sources, “Auto” cannot be selected.
En
154
Color Key
Volume
Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control.
Switches the scale of the volume display.
Settings
Settings
Default
Assigns the functions of devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
dB
Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
0-97
Displays the volume in the numeric value (0 to 97).
Assigns the functions of TV Control to each key.
RED: EXIT (closes the menu on the TV)
TV Control
Short Message
GREEN: INFO (displays information about the TV such as the resolution)
YELLOW: BROADCAST (switches the TV broadcast type)
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
BLUE: INPUT (switches the TV input)
input selection and volume adjustment).
This setting is effective when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Y
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
• For details on “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu, see “HDMI Control” (p.145)
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup after connecting HDMI Control
compatible devices (p.181).
Wallpaper
• HDMI Control might not work properly.
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
■ Display Set
Settings
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Y
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.157) is set to “On”.
En
155
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal.
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1-2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
switching.
Settings
Trigger Mode
Main
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Power
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
Zone2
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone
specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.”
Manual
Zone3
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission
with “Manual”.
Source
Zone4
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1-7, AUX, AUDIO 1-4*, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
All
* AUDIO 4: RX-A3080 only
Settings
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in
this option.
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
En
156
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with input switching in Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is
synchronized with the input switching in any zone.
■ ECO
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
Configures the power supply settings.
You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting “ECO Mode” to “On”. After setting, be
sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.
Settings
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On
Enables the eco mode.
Y
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
Auto Power Standby
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no
input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby
■ Memory Guard
mode.
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Memory Guard
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
5 minutes, 20 minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit
has not detected any input signal for the specified time.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the
specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to
standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Settings
Off
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
X
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Default
U.K., Europe and Russia models: 20 minutes
Other models: Off
X
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front
display.
Icon
En
157
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
■ Firmware Update
Displays information about the firmware update.
Firmware Update
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
Updates the firmware via the network. You can also check the firmware version and system ID.
1
2
Choices
Firmware Version
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
System ID
Displays the system ID number.
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
X
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).
• If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may
not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, wait a while before
updating the firmware again, or update the firmware using the USB memory device. For details on using the
PROGRAM
USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)” (p.162).
3
4
5
USB Update
Perform a firmware update using a USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu.
X
For information about updating the firmware using a USB memory device, see “Updating the firmware (FIRM.
UPDATE)” (p.162) in “Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)”.
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
En
158
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
X
Default settings are underlined.
Item
Function
SPEAKER IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
159
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
159
REMOTE ID
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
159
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
REMOTE SENSOR
ON
Page
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is
turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
160
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
160
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
160
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.
161
DTS MODE
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
161
BACKUP/RESTORE
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from
the backup.
161
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
162
FIRM. UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
162
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
162
ON
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF
Turns off the remote control sensor.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
REMOTE ID
ID1
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1).
When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique
remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1, ID2
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
SPEAKER¡IMP.
8¬MIN
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 together for 5 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 together for 5 seconds.
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers
X
connected.
If the remote control ID does not match that of the unit, “RemID Mismatch” appears on the unit’s front
display when the remote control is operated.
Settings
6 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use
4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.
En
159
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
(Brazil, Asia and General models only)
MONITOR CHECK
YES
TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.143)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region.
when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different
Settings
resolution than the detected resolution.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by
10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by
9-kHz steps.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution
supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified
resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
Y
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after
TV FORMAT
NTSC
“MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Brazil and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
En
160
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
Switching the DTS format notification setting (DTS MODE)
DTS MODE
MODE 1
4K MODE
MODE 1
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and
Switches the DTS format notification setting.
playback device are connected to the unit.
This setting informs the video device (such as BD/DVD player) about the DTS formats that the
Settings
unit supports.
Settings
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
MODE 1
MODE 2
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed
correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.
MODE 1
Use this setting under normal circumstances.
Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.
Use this setting if the video device (such as BD/DVD player) fails to properly output
a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.
MODE 2
Format
MODE 1
8 bit
RGB 4:4:4
,
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
4K/60, 50 Hz
4K/30, 25, 24 Hz
10 bit
MODE 2
12 bit
8 bit
10 bit
-
-
-
-
Backing up/recovering the settings (BACKUP/RESTORE)
12 bit
BACKUP/RESTORE
BACKUP
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
-
YCbCr 4:2:0
,
,
-
Backups and restores all the unit's setting to a USB memory device. Prepare a USB memory
RGB 4:4:4
,
,
-
device using FAT16 or FAT32 format in advance.
YCbCr 4:4:4
,
,
-
Choices
YCbCr 4:2:2
,
,
Y
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the USB memory device.
RESTORE
Restores the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has
been created).
When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet.
■ Backup/rstore procedure
1
2
Connect the USB memory device to the USB jack on the front panel.
To start the process, press STRAIGHT to select “BACKUP” or “RESTORE” and then press INFO
on the front panel.
3
Press INFO again after the confirmation message appears on the front display.
X
To cancel the operation, press STRAIGHT.
En
161
4
Updating the firmware (FIRM. UPDATE)
When “Please Power Off!” appears on the front display, press z (power) to set the unit to
standby mode and turn it on again.
FIRM. UPDATE
USB
If “Failed” appears on the front display, check the following and start the process again.
In case of “BACKUP”:
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as
• You cannot overwrite save. When you save the settings repeatedly, please move the file in
needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the
different folder.
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information
• The file is stored by the name of “MC_backup_(model name).dat” in the root of the USB
supplied with updates.
memory device.
■ Firmware update procedure
In case of “RESTORE”:
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the
information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
• Check that the file is stored in the route of the USB memory device.
Y
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware
update.
• “RESTORE” is effective after backuping all the settings.
• Do not turn off the unit during the backuping and restoring process. Otherwise, the settings may not be
Choices
restored correctly.
• The user information (such as account, password) is not saved.
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
X
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after SETUP is
pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
firmware via the network” (p.163).
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Choices
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
VERSION
x.xx
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
X
• You can also check the firmware version in “Information” (p.143) in the “System” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
En
162
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
New firmware that provides additional features or product
MAIN 2 3 4
SLEEP
PARTY
T
ZONE
HDMI OUT
Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable
during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
INPUT
TUNER
NET
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).
BLUETOOTH
USB
PRESET
RED
Updating the unit’s firmware
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the
PURE DIRECT
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
SETUP
1
2
Read the on-screen description.
Use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update begins.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on
the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel.
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
The firmware update is complete.
Cursor keys
ENTER
X
• The firmware update indicator (p.15) on the front display lights up when a firmware
update is available via the network.
TOP
MENU
HOME
POP-UP
//MENU
MENU
RETURN
PROGRAM SUR. DECODE
VOLUME
ENHANCER
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED
SETUP” menu (p.162).
• You might not get the message or the lighting up firmware update indicator on the
front display depending on the condition of the network connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.162).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
SETUP is pressed.
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, select “LATER” in step 2, and then
follow the on-screen instructions. When a screen to confirm the firmware update
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
TUNING
• If you want to cancel without doing anything now, select “CLOSE”.
• Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more.
• You can also start the firmware update by pressing INFO on the front panel.
AI
X
BAND
appears after turning off the unit, press ENTER to start the firmware update.
When the firmware update is complete, the unit enters standby mode automatically.
TUNING
• To perform the update when turning off the unit, refer to the following instructions.
– The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.
– The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two
minutes pass after the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.
– To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.
– The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit
with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.
En
163
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction
manuals for each device.
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “YPAO” to optimize the
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
speaker settings again (p.55). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use
“Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.131).
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are
watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to turn off
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
the short messages.
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the
unit in advance (p.140). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.151).
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing
“Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.157).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied.
If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha
applied when the receiver is turned on (p.140). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or
product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different
Zone3 (p.151).
remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.159).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio
“Option” menu (p.122).
played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this
function, set “HDMI Standby Through” (p.146) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled.
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.181). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable
HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required
En
164
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
First, check the following:
1
2
3
The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.
The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest
When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks
Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
if you try to turn on the power.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit.
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it
supply voltage.
again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used for
the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to
“Off” (p.157).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.159).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers
(p.29).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the
unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and
(such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall
supply voltage.
outlet and plug it again.)
En
165
Problem
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong
lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).
The remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.159).
The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the
Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys.
The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote
control do not operate
The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote
Set “Color Key” (p.155) in the “Setup” menu to “Default”.
control have been changed.
HDMI control setting is “Off”.
Set “HDMI Control” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
En
166
Audio
Problem
No sound.
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format
of the input signal, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.140).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The volume cannot be increased.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.135).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker
settings (p.132).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume
(p.134).
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.135).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “YPAO” (p.55) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to
“Use” (p.134).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
No sound from the playback device (connected to the Protection).
unit with HDMI).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the
limit.
No sound from the playback device (when HDMI
Control is used).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the playback device audio is output
from the speakers connected to the unit.
TV audio is selected as the input source.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
En
167
Problem
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used).
Cause
Remedy
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an
HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.42).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
(If you are trying to use ARC)
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.145).
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
No sound is coming from the Zone assigned with
“HDMI ZONE OUT Assign”.
The audio output from the HDMI OUT 3 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled.
Set “HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.145).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only.
To check it, use “Information” in the “Sound” menu (p.136). If necessary, change the
digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off”
(p.157).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is distorted.
The sound is interrupted.
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.112).
En
168
Video
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.160).
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to the
unit with HDMI).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video/HDMI”
in the “Setup” menu (p.143). For information about video signals supported by the unit,
see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.183).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV
and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The video is interrupted.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using
(p.74).
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio”
to internal circuitry switching.
(p.112).
En
169
FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is not available for the Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Monaural” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.124).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM
other electrical equipment.
antenna.
Select the station manually (p.84).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.84).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the
supplied AM antenna.
DAB radio (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models only)
Problem
No DAB radio reception.
Cause
Remedy
An initial scan has not been performed.
Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.87).
Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
There is no DAB coverage in your area.
Check with your dealer or WorldDAB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of
the DAB coverage in your area.
There is multi-path interference.
Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.90), and adjust the
antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna.
No DAB radio reception even after performing an
initial scan.
DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.
DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may
Contact the DAB broadcaster.
not provide information.
No DAB radio sound.
The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service.
En
170
Try the station later or select another station.
Bluetooth
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted
during playback.
Enable the Bluetooth function (p.149).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.96).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not
working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.96).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.96).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
171
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to
“On” on the unit (p.147). If you want to configure the network parameters manually,
check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your
network (p.147).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
router (access point).
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access
point).
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might
disturb the wireless communication.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no
obstacles between them.
Turn off these devices.
Wireless network is not found.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
router (access point).
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are
shared (p.101).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
The unit does not detect the PC.
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
unit to your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
the PC to the same network.
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information
about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media
servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during
playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the
playback folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been
stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the
station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played
only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number
varies depending on the radio station.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
En
172
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router.
Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and
smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is not connected to the MusicCast
network.
Connect the device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
No sound from the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast connection cannot be made on
“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
“MusicCast CONTROLLER” does not detect a
MusicCast compatible device.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and start “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Disable the cellular data transmission.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The mobile device which “MusicCast CONTROLLER” is installed is not
connected to the wireless network at your home.
Connect the mobile device to the wireless router and set the MusicCast compatible
device with “MusicCast CONTROLLER”.
Turn on the MusicCast compatible device.
The MusicCast compatible device is turned off.
Enable the network standby function on the MusicCast compatible device.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
En
173
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.162).
Error indications on the front display
Message
Access denied
Cause
Remedy
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.101).
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Access error
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.51).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on
again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.159).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote
control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu to “ON” (p.159).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some
reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats
supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.101). If the unit supports
the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic.
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
Unable to play
Update failed.
En
174
Glossary
This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio
CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest
Audio information (audio decoding format)
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better
Dolby Atmos
DTS 96/24
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format
Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as
remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This
audio quality than that used for CDs.
independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3
technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of
DTS Dialog Control
sound above the listener.
DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog
Dolby Atmos Stream
more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby
of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may
TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata
add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature.
that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV
DTS Digital Surround
receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio.
Dolby Digital
This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel
DTS-ES
audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds
Dolby Digital Plus
a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that
recorded.
support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Express
Dolby Enabled Speaker
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the
rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming
ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled
services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback.
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing
Dolby Surround
multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for
discs).
playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as
DTS-HD Master Audio
well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater
technology.
experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of
Dolby TrueHD
96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition
BD (Blu-ray discs).
home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96
kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD
(Blu-ray discs).
En
175
DTS Neo:6
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing
channels of surround sound.
data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
DTS:X
DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels,
DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in
front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to
automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to
a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at
www.dts.com/dtsx
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in
compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression
method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10
maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on
Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3.
Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to
provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can
produce up to 11.x channels.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is
the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on
a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is
digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the
sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric
value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting
audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression
methods.
En
176
Audio Information (Others)
HDMI and video information
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
Component video signal
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and
unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and
Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals
woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
is independent.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
Composite video signal
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and
added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel
transmitted with a single cable.
is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Deep Color
Lip sync
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using
in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video
8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to
output.
increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal
transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital
contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal
transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any
loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video
interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and
allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of
sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.
En
177
Network information
Yamaha technologies
SSID
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced
Wi-Fi
in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall
material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet
hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the
wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with
audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home.
network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can
carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
CINEMA DSP HD3
WPS
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD3
feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a
intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.
wireless home network.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such
as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones
have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed
on headphones.
SURROUND:AI
The AI incorporated in the DSP analyzes scenes by focusing on sound elements such as “dialogue”, “background
music”, “ambient sounds” and “sound effects” as well as instantaneously creates the optimal surround effect in real
time. An expressive power beyond conventional single sound field effects maximizes the realistic feel.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left
and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front
surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a
listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence
speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed
of CINEMA DSP.
En
178
Supported devices and file formats
File formats
For information about specifications of each file, refer to the instruction manual of your
This section explains the devices and file formats supported by the unit.
recording device or consult file’s help.
Supported devices
■ USB/PC (NAS)
For information about specifications of each device, refer to the instruction manual of it.
File
■ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
WAV *
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible,
depending on the model.
■ USB devices
• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices that are in FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect any other type of USB devices.
storage device.
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32
-
2
,
MP3
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
WMA
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
-
8 to 320
2
-
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24
-
2
,
ALAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96
16/24
-
2
,
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192/352.8/384
16/24/32
-
2
,
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz/
11.2 MHz
1
-
2
-
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB
Sampling frequency
(kHz)
■ AirPlay
* Linear PCM format only. 32 bit-float files cannot be played back.
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain
Y
Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC
files on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Made for.
iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6,
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s
• When the sampling frequency is 352.8 kHz, playback is downsampled to 176.4 kHz; when the sampling
frequency is 384 kHz, playback is downsampled to 192 kHz.
iPad Pro (10.5″), iPad Pro (12.9″) 2nd Generation, iPad Pro (12.9″) 1st Generation, iPad Pro
• When Pure Direct is enabled, playback at 352.8 and 384 kHz is not downsampled. In addition, when Pure Direct
(9.7″), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini, iPad (5th generation),
is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered.
iPad (4th generation), iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2
iPod touch (6th generation), iPod touch (5th generation)
(as of May 2018)
En
179
Video signal flow
Video conversion table
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output
X
to a TV as shown below.
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
TV
HDMI out
480i/576i
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
720p
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
1080i
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
1080p/50, 60 Hz
m (*)
m (*)
m
m
m
m
Resolution
480i/576i
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
720p
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
1080i
m (*)
m
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
m (*)
480i/576i
m
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
480p/576p
COMPONENT VIDEO in
VIDEO in
VIDEO
VIDEO
480i/576i
VIDEO in
m
m (*)
m: Available
* If “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” is set to “Zone2”, conversion to 4K is possible only from 1080p. All other resolutions are pass-through.
En
180
Multi-zone output
Information on HDMI
Audio signals that can be output to Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4 vary depending on how you
This section explains the functions related to HDMI and its signal compatibility.
connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks.
Using the unit’s internal
amplifier (p.39)
EXTRA SP 1-2 jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
In \ Out
Zone2
Zone3
HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.111)
Zone2
Zone3
m (*3)
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
HDMI OUT 3
(ZONE OUT) jack
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power
Zone2 (*1)
Zone4 (*2)
and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control external devices (such as
m (*4)
m (*5, 8)
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable.
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
m (*6)
Analog audio (AUDIO)
m
m
m
m
m
USB (*7)
m
m
m
m
m
Network sources (*7)
m
m
m
m
m
TUNER
m
m
m
m
m
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
m: Available
(Example)
*1 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
(HDMI Audio Output - HDMI ZONE OUT: On)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
*2 Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
Playback device
also turns off
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
The unit turns off
(standby)
Available when “HDMI ZONE OUT Assign” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
Turn off the TV
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels]
when the input source selected in the main zone is selected)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection
selected in the main zone is selected)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
• Controlling the external device from which video is displayed on the TV (playback and menu
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input, or use the
operations)
party mode (p.115).
• Controlling the TV when you select TV audio input that is set in “TV Audio Input” in the
*8 If the Main Zone and Zone4 share the same input, the audio format that can be received in
“Setup” menu
the Main Zone is restricted by the device connected to Zone4.
• Controlling the TV with the color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) keys of the remote control
when “TV Control” is set for the color keys
En
181
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback starts
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Press SCENE 1
Y
HDMI Control might not work properly.
Y
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
5
Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
6
Press SETUP.
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback
5
6
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
3
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
4
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
devices.
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select
the input source manually.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7
8
Configure the settings of the unit.
1
Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
2
Press SETUP.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV
or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
Y
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4.
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the
limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
3
the TV.
Use the cursor keys to select “Video/HDMI”.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more
effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
En
182
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
HDMI signal compatibility
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be
to the TV.
output, depending on the type of the DVD player.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
2
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so
that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to
signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback
“AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
device.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
• “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
• The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked
“ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for the TV.
Y
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.44).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
X
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO
1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.75), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE 7. (The settings must
be changed only when SCENE 7 is used as the default (TV Viewing).)
En
183
Trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos,
Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans Version 1.004.
Copyright © June 2015, Google
(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font Name
Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version1.1.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Android™ Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Google Noto Fonts
This product uses the following fonts.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol,
DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
Explanations regarding GPL
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(https://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
Licenses
Apple, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro, iPhone, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The trademark “iPhone” is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are certification
marks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, Wi-Fi Protected Setup and WPA2 are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is
under license.
(Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models)
MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental
performance.
The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.
En
184
For information on the licenses of the third-party software in this
product, refer to the following.
http://(IP address of this product*)/licenses.html
* IP address of this product is checked with MusicCast
CONTROLLER.
Specifications
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
Input jacks
[RX-A3080]
• Analog Audio
– Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R *3, R.PRESENCE L/R *4)
[RX-A3080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
[RX-A2080]
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, AUX)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1-2, AUDIO 3)
(Supported sampling frequencies: 32 kHz to 192 kHz)
• Video
Composite x 4 (AV 1-4)
– VGA
– 480i/60 Hz
*3 Note: barter to ZONE2
– 576i/50 Hz
*4 Note: barter to ZONE3
– 480p/60 Hz
– Pre Out (Balance) x 2 (FRONT) (1:GND, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
– 576p/50 Hz
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
[RX-A2080]
– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
– Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND
BACK L/R)
– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
– ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
• HDMI Output
– 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Supported Audio Formats
– Dolby Atmos
HDMI OUT x 3 (HDMI OUT 1-3 *5)
*5 HDMI OUT 3 is a jack dedicated to zone out.
– DTS:X
– Dolby TrueHD
Other jacks
– Dolby Digital Plus
• YPAO MIC x 1
– Dolby Digital
• REMOTE IN x 1
– DTS-HD Master Audio
• REMOTE OUT x 1
– DTS-HD High Resolution
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
– DTS Express
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
• RS-232C x 1
– DTS
Component x 2 (AV 1-2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 7 (AV 1-7)
• Others
Output jacks
HDMI
• Analog Audio
• HDMI Features
– Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R *1, EXTRA SP 2 L/R *2)
– DSD 2.8 MHz 2-ch to 6-ch
– PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24 bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
– 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit)
– 3D Video
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
TUNER
*1 Note: Assignment is possible
[F.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
– ARC (Audio Return Channel)
*2 Note: Assignment is possible
[R.PRESENCE, ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE]
– Auto Lip Sync
[Australia model]
– 21:9 Aspect Ratio
DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)
– Deep Color
[U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
– x.v.Color
DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
– BT.2020 Colorimetry
[Other models]
– HDR (High Dynamic Range)
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
– Subwoofer Out x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1-2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monaural x 2)
– Headphone x 1
• Analog Tuner
– HDMI Control (CEC)
– HD audio playback
USB
– Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode
– HDMI Zone Output
• Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
En
185
Bluetooth
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Sink Function
• Decoding Format
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................150 W+150 W
– Dolby Atmos
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
– Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
• Bluetooth Version.................................................................... Ver. 4.2
– Dolby Digital
• Supported Profile
– DTS:X
Sink Function .................................................................A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec
[RX-A2080]
Center ......................................................................................150 W
Surround L/R ...............................................................150 W+150 W
Surround Back L/R ......................................................150 W+150 W
– DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Front Presence L/R......................................................150 W+150 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
– DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Front L/R......................................................................140 W+140 W
• Wireless Output ...................................................... Bluetooth Class 2
– DTS Digital Surround
Center ......................................................................................140 W
• Maximum Communication Distance ................................10 m (33 ft)
• Post Decoding Format
Surround L/R ...............................................................140 W+140 W
Sink Function ....................................................................... SBC, AAC
MusicCast
• Controlled by MusicCast Application (iOS, Android)
• MusicCast Link Client ..........................................Main, Zone2, Zone3
• MusicCast Link Master (Input Source) .................................................
NET/USB/Bluetooth, Analog External Input, Digital External Input,
Zone2
– Dolby Surround
Surround Back L/R ......................................................140 W+140 W
– Neural:X
Front Presence L/R......................................................140 W+140 W
– DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R......................................................................155 W+155 W
Audio Section
Center ......................................................................................155 W
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
Surround Back L/R ......................................................155 W+155 W
• Network Connectivity ....................................Extend Mode, Connect
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 Ω)
Network
Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W
• PC Client Function
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• Wi-Fi function
– Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
– Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection and
USB connection
Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ..................................................................... 150 W+150 W
Center...................................................................................... 150 W
– Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
Surround L/R............................................................... 150 W+150 W
– Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 150 W+150 W
– Radio Frequency Band: 2.4/5 GHz
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 150 W+150 W
– Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac*
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
* 20 MHz channel bandwidth only
Surround L/R ...............................................................155 W+155 W
Front Presence L/R......................................................155 W+155 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 200 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 200 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 200 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 200 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 200 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R............................................................................ 185 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 185 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 185 W/ch
Front L/R ..................................................................... 165 W+165 W
Center...................................................................................... 165 W
Surround L/R............................................................... 165 W+165 W
Surround Back L/R...................................................... 165 W+165 W
Front Presence L/R ..................................................... 165 W+165 W
En
186
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 185 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 185 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 230 W/ch
[RX-A2080]
Surround L/R......................................................................220 W/ch
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Surround Back L/R.............................................................220 W/ch
(Pure Direct, Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 190 W/ch
Front Presence L/R ............................................................220 W/ch
PHONO.......................................................................... 95 dB or more
Center ................................................................................ 190 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 190 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 190 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 190 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R ............................................................................ 175 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 175 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 175 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc................................................................. 110 dB or more
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
[RX-A3080]
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................ 175/220/295/410 W
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) ........................................ 165/210/285/405 W
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 Ω ........................................................ 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ............................................ 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 175 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω) ................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Russia models].................... 220 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
[RX-A3080]
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...........................................45 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ..................................... 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Level / Output Impedance
Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz).......................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch
ZONE OUT ......................................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
PRE OUT/ZONE OUT ..................................................... 2.0 V or more
• Headphone Impedance..................................................16 Ω or more
Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch
• Frequency Response
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 230 W/ch
[RX-A2080]
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)............................................. +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz).......................................................0±0.5 dB
[RX-A3080]
Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz
Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz
Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover ....................................................................3.5 kHz
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..............................................................................................12 dB/oct.
Video Section
Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less
[RX-A2080]
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 220 W/ch
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less
Front Presence L/R............................................................ 220 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 Ω)
..................................................................................... 0.04% or less
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Bass Boost/Cut.....................................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)...............................................................24 dB/oct.
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) .................................... 0.04% or less
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 220 W/ch
Main Zone
• Filter Characteristics
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch
Zone2/Zone3 ........................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover ........................................................................350 Hz
• Maximum Output Level
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)
Center ................................................................................ 230 W/ch
Main Zone .............................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Boost/Cut................................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)...................................................... 1.0 V/470 Ω
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 230 W/ch
AUDIO 2 etc........................................................ 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
• Tone Control Characteristics
• Maximum Input Signal
Front L/R ............................................................................ 230 W/ch
Surround L/R ..................................................................... 230 W/ch
(Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO............................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more
• Damping Factor
Surround Back L/R ............................................................ 175 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 Ω)
Speaker Out................................................................... 150 μV or less
• Channel Separation
[RX-A2080]
• Video Signal Type...................................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Video Signal Level
Composite ........................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..................................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr........................................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
Front L/R ............................................................................ 220 W/ch
Center ................................................................................ 220 W/ch
En
187
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
.........................................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............. 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
[Other models]............................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Monaural.......................................................................3 μV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................. 69 dB/68 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Monaural/Stereo ............................................................... 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input.......................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced
AM section (except Australia, U.K., Europe,
Middle East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
...................................................................530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models].................................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
DAB section (Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle
East and Russia models)
• Tuning Range...................................... 174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)
• Power Consumption.................................................................. 490 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
..................................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off .................................................................. 1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired ........................................................................................ 1.4 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ........................................................................ 1.7 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On .............. 1.5 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wi-Fi), Bluetooth Standby On ................................................... 2.5 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Brazil, Asia, Taiwan, Central and South America and General models]
..........................................................................................................1210 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
.................................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)
...............................435 x 269 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 10-5/8” x 18-5/8”)
* Including legs and protrusion
• Weight
[RX-A3080]
[China, Australia, U.K., Europe, Middle East and Russia models]
............................................................................... 19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)
• Support Audio Format .............. MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2
[Other models]...................................................... 18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)
• Antenna.................................................................... 75 Ω unbalanced
[RX-A2080] ................................................................ 17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the
publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha
website then download the manual file.
[Brazil and Central and South America models]
.................................................. AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Taiwan model]............................................AC110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ............................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ........................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models] ............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ................................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
En
188
Yamaha Global Site
https://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads
https://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Group
© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 05/2018 AM-A0
AV17-0221

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project